Brother Hl 2400C Series Users Manual COV

Brother-Hl-2400C-Owner-S-Manual brother-hl-2400c-owner-s-manual

Brother-Hl-2400Cn-Owner-S-Manual brother-hl-2400cn-owner-s-manual

Manual en-US%5CPrinters%5CConsumer%5CUsersManual%5CUM_HL_2400C_2400CN_EN_21 Brother HL-2400C Printer User Manual | Manual Device

HL-2400C Series UM_HL_2400C_2400CN_EN_21

HL-2400C Series to the manual b5715e31-5498-9654-752a-1a5a506b02a3

2015-01-25

: Brother Brother-Hl-2400C-Series-Users-Manual-213250 brother-hl-2400c-series-users-manual-213250 brother pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 280 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Cover
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Appendices
Index

Brother Color Laser Printer

HL-2400C

series

USER’S GUIDE

Trademarks

Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.

Apple and LaserWriter are registered trademarks, and TrueType is a trademark of

Apple Computer, Inc.

Centronics is a trademark of Genicom Corporation.

EPSON is a registered trademark, and FX-850 and FX-80 are trademarks of Seiko

Epson Corporation.

Hewlett-Packard, HP, PCL5C and PCL are registered trademarks, and HP

LaserJet 4+, HP LaserJet Plus, HP LaserJet II, HP LaserJet IID, HP LaserJet IIID,

HP-GL, HP-GL/2, and Bi-Tronics are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.

IBM, Proprinter XL, Proprinter, and IBM/PC are registered trademarks of

International Business Machines Corporation.

Intellifont is a registered trademark of AGFA Corporation, a division of Miles,

Inc.

Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States

and other countries.

PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

All other brand and product names mentioned in this user’s guide are registered

trademarks or trademarks of respective companies.

Compilation and Publication

Under the supervision of Brother Industries Ltd., this manual has been compiled

and published, covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.

The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to

change without notice.

Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications

and materials contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages

(including consequential) caused by reliance on the materials presented, including

but not limited to typographical and other errors relating to the publication.

Shipment of the Printer

If for any reason you must ship your Printer, carefully package the Printer to avoid any

damage during transit. It is recommended that you save and use the original packaging. The

Printer should also be adequately insured with the carrier.

WARNING

When shipping the Printer, the TONER CARTRIDGES and ALL CONSUMABLES must

be removed from the Printer. Failure to remove the CONSUMABLES during shipping

will cause severe damage to the Printer and will VOID THE WARRANTY (refer to

user’s manual).

TABLE OF CONTENTS

iii

(For USA & CANADA Only)

For technical and operational assistance, please call:

In USA 1-877-284-3238 (outside California)

949-859-9700 Ext. 329(within California)

In CANADA 1-800-853-6660

514-685-6464 (within Montreal)

If you have comments or suggestions, please write us at:

In USA Printer Customer Support

Brother International Corporation

15 Musick

Irvine, CA 92718

In CANADA Brother International Corporation (Canada), Ltd.

- Marketing Dept.

1, rue Hôtel de Ville

Dollard-des-Ormeaux, PQ, Canada H9B 3H6

BBS

For downloading drivers from our Bulletin Board Service, call:

In USA 1-888-298-3616

In CANADA 1-514-685-2040

Please log on to our BBS with your first name, last name and a four digit

number for your password. Our BBS supports modem speeds up to 14,400,

8 bits no parity, 1 stop bit.

Fax-Back System

Brother Customer Service has installed an easy to use Fax-Back System so

you can get instant answers to common technical questions and product

information for all Brother products. This is available 24 hours a day, 7 days

a week. You can use the system to send the information to any fax machine,

not just the one you are calling from.

Please call 1-800-521-2846 (USA) or 1-800-681-9838 (Canada) and follow

the voice prompts to receive faxed instructions on how to use the system

and your index of Fax-Back subjects.

DEALERS/SERVICE CENTERS (USA only)

For the name of an authorized dealer or service center, call 1-800-284-4357.

SERVICE CENTERS (Canada only)

For service center addresses in Canada, call 1-800-853-6660

INTERNET ADDRESS

For technical questions and downloading drivers:http://www.brother.com

USER’S GUIDE

Definitions of Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

The following conventions are used in this User’s Guide:

Warning

Indicates warnings that must be observed to prevent possible

personal injury.

Caution

Indicates cautions that must be observed to use the printer properly or

prevent damage to the printer.

✒Note

Indicates notes and useful tips to remember when using the printer.

To Use the Printer Safely

Warning

This printer is heavy and weighs approximately 36kg (79.37lbs).

When you move or lift this printer, be sure at least 2 people lift it

together.

Warning

The Fusing unit is extremely hot during operation. Wait

approximately 30 minutes before exchanging consumables that are in

the area of the Fusing unit .

Fig. 0-1 Fusing unit

Warning

If metal objects, water or other liquids get inside the printer, turn the

printer off immediately and unplug the printer. Contact your dealer.

Warning

Do not put consumables such as the Toner Cartridges and the Waste

Toner Pack into a fire. Consumables are flammable under certain

conditions..

Warning

Do not look at the laser beam light directly. It might cause damage to

your eyesight.

Warning

Do not run the printer with the Top Cover, Front Cover and Rear

Access Covers open.

Warning

Be sure to turn off the printer before you exchange consumables.

Warning

Do not put anything on the printer.

Warning

If you spill the fuser oil, carefully wipe it up completely.

USER’S GUIDE

Printer Do's and Don'ts for Optimum Print Quality

Caution

When you move or lift this printer, be sure to keep the printer flat and

remove the Toner Cartridges, Waste Toner Pack, Oil Bottle and Fusing

Unit first so that they will not spill. Damage caused by failure to remove

the supplies will void your warranty.

Caution

Do not touch the rollers of the Fusing unit. If you do, it might cause print

quality reduction.

Fig. 0-2 Fusing unit Rollers

vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

IMPORTANT INFORMATION: REGULATIONS........................xv

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION....................................................1-1

ABOUT THIS MANUAL......................................................................1-1

ABOUT THIS PRINTER.......................................................................1-2

Features............................................................................................1-2

Options........................................................................................1-6

Operating and Storage Environment................................................1-7

Power Supply .............................................................................1-7

Environment...............................................................................1-7

CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED.............................................2-1

BEFORE USING THE PRINTER.........................................................2-1

Checking the Components................................................................2-1

General View....................................................................................2-3

SETTING UP THE PRINTER...............................................................2-4

Removing the Protective Parts.........................................................2-4

Installing the (OPC) Belt Cartridge..................................................2-5

Installing the Toner Cartridges.........................................................2-7

Installing the Oil Bottle and the Fuser Cleaner................................2-9

Loading Paper in the Media Cassette...............................................2-11

Connecting the Printer to Your Computer........................................2-14

Turning the Printer On.....................................................................2-16

Plugging in the Power Cord and Turn the Printer On.................2-16

Printing the Test Patterns or Lists.....................................................2-18

Installing the Printer Driver..............................................................2-20

Computer Requirements ............................................................2-20

Prepare Windows 95/98 for the Printer......................................2-20

Prepare Windows 3.1/3.11 for the Printer..................................2-21

Prepare Windows NT 4.0 for the Printer....................................2-22

USER’S GUIDE

viii

CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER..........3-1

AUTOMATIC EMULATION SELECTION.........................................3-1

AUTOMATIC INTERFACE SELECTION..........................................3-3

ABOUT THE CONTROL PANEL........................................................3-5

Selecting the Local Language Display.............................................3-5

Using the Panel Buttons...................................................................3-6

Printer Settings.................................................................................3-7

User Settings..............................................................................3-7

Factory Settings.........................................................................3-7

PAPER HANDLING.............................................................................3-8

Print Media.......................................................................................3-8

Paper Size...................................................................................3-8

Recommended Paper..................................................................3-9

Printable Area...................................................................................3-10

Using Envelopes.........................................................................3-11

Cassette Feed....................................................................................3-13

Manual Feed.....................................................................................3-14

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL ...............................................4-1

DISPLAY AND LEDS..........................................................................4-1

Display.............................................................................................4-1

Printer Status Messages (on the upper row)...............................4-2

About Maintenance Messages..........................................................4-4

LEDs.................................................................................................4-5

READY.......................................................................................4-5

DATA.........................................................................................4-5

ALARM......................................................................................4-5

ON LINE....................................................................................4-5

BUTTONS IN NORMAL MODE.........................................................4-6

SEL Button.......................................................................................4-6

SET Button......................................................................................4-7

▲ (UP) or ▼ (DOWN) Button........................................................4-7

MODE Button..................................................................................4-8

MODE Button Settings in HP PCL5C,

EPSON FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL Modes.......................4-9

MODE Button Settings in BR-Script 2 Mode............................4-12

MODE Button Settings in HP-GL Mode....................................4-14

Basic Operation Procedures........................................................4-16

Operation Example: Selecting the Parallel Interface.................4-17

INTERFACE MODE..................................................................4-18

FORMAT MODE.......................................................................4-21

ORIENTATION....................................................................4-21

AUTO MODE.......................................................................4-22

PAGE FORMAT MODE.......................................................4-23

COLOR MODE.....................................................................4-26

GRAPHICS MODE...............................................................4-27

RESOLUTION MODE...............................................................4-29

PAGE PROTECTION................................................................4-32

CARD OPERATION..................................................................4-33

ADVANCED MODE.................................................................4-41

NETWORK MODE...............................................................4-41

ERROR PRINT......................................................................4-43

CONTINUE MODE..............................................................4-44

SCALABLE FONT...............................................................4-44

INPUT BUFFER....................................................................4-45

SAVE SETTINGS.................................................................4-46

PAGE COUNTER......................................................................4-46

EXIT MODE..............................................................................4-46

FONT Button...................................................................................4-47

Setting the Font and Symbol Set in the HP PCL5C Mode.........4-47

Setting the Font and Character Set in the EPSON FX-850

or IBM Proprinter XL Mode ......................................................4-51

List of Fonts................................................................................4-55

List of Symbol/Character Sets....................................................4-56

FORM FEED Button (REPRINT Button)......................................4-57

Form Feed...................................................................................4-57

Reprint Function.........................................................................4-57

CONTINUE Button.......................................................................4-58

USER’S GUIDE

BUTTONS IN SHIFT MODE...............................................................4-59

SHIFT Button.................................................................................4-59

EMULATION Button.....................................................................4-60

About Emulation Modes.............................................................4-62

ECONOMY Button.........................................................................4-63

TONER SAVE MODE...............................................................4-63

POWER SAVE MODE..............................................................4-63

FEEDER Button..............................................................................4-64

FEEDER.....................................................................................4-64

MANUAL MODE......................................................................4-66

MEDIA TYPE............................................................................4-66

SMALL SIZE.............................................................................4-66

COPY Button...................................................................................4-67

RESET Button.................................................................................4-68

List of Factory Settings...............................................................4-69

TEST Button....................................................................................4-75

HEX DUMP MODE..............................................................................4-77

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE ....................................................5-1

REPLACING THE CONSUMABLES..................................................5-1

Toner Cartridges...............................................................................5-3

Toner Nearly Empty Message....................................................5-3

Toner Empty Message................................................................5-3

Replacing the Toner Cartridges..................................................5-4

Oil Bottle..........................................................................................5-6

Oil Bottle Low Message.............................................................5-6

Oil Bottle Empty Message..........................................................5-6

Replacing the Oil Bottle.............................................................5-6

Fuser Cleaner....................................................................................5-9

Fuser Cleaner Message...............................................................5-9

Fuser Cleaner Change Message..................................................5-9

Replacing the Fuser Cleaner.............................................................5-9

Waste Toner Pack.............................................................................5-11

Waste Toner Pack Full Message.................................................5-11

Replacing the Waste Toner Pack................................................5-11

(OPC) Belt Cartridge........................................................................5-13

(OPC) Belt Cartridge Message...................................................5-13

Replacing the (OPC) Belt Cartridge...........................................5-13

Ozone Filter...........................................................................................5-16

Ozone Filter................................................................................5-16

Replacing the Ozone Filter.........................................................5-16

Fusing Unit.......................................................................................5-17

Fusing Unit.................................................................................5-17

Replacing the Fusing Unit..........................................................5-17

120K Kit...........................................................................................5-20

120K Kit.....................................................................................5-20

Drum Cleaner..............................................................................5-20

Replacing the Drum Cleaner.......................................................5-20

Paper Discharger.........................................................................5-22

Replacing the Paper Discharger..................................................5-22

Replacing the Transfer Roller.....................................................5-24

CLEANING THE PRINTER.................................................................5-26

Cleaning the Printer Exterior............................................................5-26

Periodical Printer Cleaning...............................................................5-27

REPACKING AND RELOCATING THE PRINTER...........................5-28

How to Repack the Printer...............................................................5-28

OPTIONS...............................................................................................5-29

Lower TrayUnit.....................................................................................5-29

Loading Paper from the Lower Media Cassette..........................5-29

Font Card, Flash Memory/HDD Card....................................................5-31

Installing a Font Card, Flash Memory Card and HDD Card .....5-31

Selecting the Optional Fonts.......................................................5-33

Modular I/O Card...................................................................................5-34

RAM Expansion.....................................................................................5-35

USER’S GUIDE

xii

CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................6-1

TROUBLESHOOTING.........................................................................6-1

Operator Call Messages....................................................................6-1

Maintenance Messages (appear on the lower row)..........................6-3

Error Messages.................................................................................6-4

Service Call Messages......................................................................6-6

Paper Jams........................................................................................6-9

Q & A ....................................................................................................6-13

Setting Up the Printer Hardware......................................................6-13

Setting Up the Printer.......................................................................6-14

Paper Handling.................................................................................6-15

Printing.............................................................................................6-16

Print Quality.....................................................................................6-17

APPENDICES .............................................................................A-1

PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................A-1

Printing.............................................................................................A-1

Functions..........................................................................................A-2

Electrical and Mechanical................................................................A-3

PAPER SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................A-4

INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS.........................................................A-8

Bi-directional Parallel Interface.......................................................A-8

Interface Connector....................................................................A-8

Pin Assignment...........................................................................A-8

Signal Description......................................................................A-9

Parallel Cable Connection for IBM-PC/AT or

Compatible Computers and IBM-PS/2 Computers...................A-10

RS-232C Serial Interface................................................................A-11

Standard Specifications.............................................................A-11

Interface Connectors.................................................................A-11

Pin Assignment.........................................................................A-11

Signal Description....................................................................A-12

Serial Cable Connection for IBM-PC/AT or

Compatible Computers and IBM-PS/2 Computers...................A-13

xiii

SYMBOL/CHARACTER SETS..........................................................A-14

OCR Symbol Sets...........................................................................A-14

HP PCL Mode................................................................................A-15

EPSON Mode.................................................................................A-22

IBM Mode......................................................................................A-25

HP-GL Mode..................................................................................A-27

Symbol Sets Supported by the Printer’s Intellifont Compatible

Typefaces.......................................................................................A-32

Symbol Sets Supported by the Printer’s TrueType and Type 1

Font Compatible, and Original Typefaces......................................A-34

QUICK REFERENCE OF COMMANDS...........................................A-36

HP PCL Mode................................................................................A-36

PCL Command Sets..................................................................A-36

CCITT G3/G4 and TIFF...........................................................A-51

Horizontal 1200-dpi Image Format Mode................................A-54

HP-GL/2 Command Sets..........................................................A-57

Printer Job Language Commands Syntax.................................A-59

EPSON FX-850 Mode....................................................................A-60

IBM Proprinter XL Mode...............................................................A-63

HP-GL Mode..................................................................................A-66

Bar Code Control............................................................................A-68

Print Bar Codes or Expanded Characters..................................A-68

INDEX...........................................................................................Index-1

USER’S GUIDE

xiv

IMPORTANT INFORMATION: REGULATIONS

Federal Communications Commission Compliance Notice

(For U.S.A. only)

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits

are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful

interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses,

and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not

occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful

interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by

turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct

the interference by one or more of the following measures:

– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected.

– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Important

A shielded interface cable should be used in order to ensure compliance

with the limits for a Class B digital device.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries,

Ltd. could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

International Energy Star Compliance Statement

The purpose of the International Energy Star Program is to promote the development

and popularization of energy-efficient office equipment, which includes computers,

monitors, printers, facsimile receivers and copy machines world-wide.

As an International Energy Star partner, Brother Industries, Ltd. has decided that this

product meets the guideline of the program.

Industry Canada Compliance Statement (For Canada only)

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian

Interference Causing Equipment Regulations.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du

Règlement sur la matériel brouilleur du Canada.

Laser Safety (120 V model only)

This printer is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S.

Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation

Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and

Safety Act of 1968. This means that the printer does not produce

hazardous laser radiation.

Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within

protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape

from the machine during any phase of user operation.

FDA Regulations (120 V model only)

U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has implemented regulations

for laser products manufactured on and after August 2, 1976.

Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.

☛ Caution: Use of controls, adjustments or performance of

procedures other than those specified in this manual

may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

USER’S GUIDE

xvi

Radio Interference(220-240 V model only)

This printer complies with EN55022(CISPR Publication 22)/Class B.

Before this product is used, ensure that you use a double-shielded

interface cable with twisted-pair conductors and that is marked

“IEEE1284 compliant”. The cable must not exceed 1.8 metres in length.

IEC 825 Specification (220-240 V model only)

This printer is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC 825

specifications. The label shown below is attached in countries where

required.

This printer has a Class 3B Laser Diode which emits invisible laser

radiation in the Scanner Unit. The Scanner Unit should not be opened

under any circumstances.

☛ Caution: Use of controls, adjustments or performance of

procedures other than those specified in this manual

may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

The following caution label is attached on the cover of the scanner unit.

xvii

For Finland and Sweden

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE

KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

☛ Varoitus! Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa

mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle

näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.

Varning – Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna Bruksanvisning

specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som

överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.

IMPORTANT - For Your Safety

To ensure safe operation the three-pin plug supplied must be inserted

only into a standard three-pin power point which is effectively grounded

through the normal household wiring.

Extension cords used with the equipment must be three-conductor and be

correctly wired to provide connection to ground. Incorrectly wired

extension cords are a major cause of fatalities.

The fact that the equipment operates satisfactorily does not imply that the

power is grounded and that the installation is completely safe. For your

safety, if in any doubt about the effective grounding of the power, consult

a qualified electrician.

Disconnect device

This printer must be installed near a power outlet which is easily

accessible. In case of emergencies, you must disconnect the power cord

from the power outlet in order to shut off the power completely.

Geräuschemission / Acoustic Noise Emission (For Germany Only)

Lpa < 70 dB(A) DIN 45635-19-01-KL2

Wiring Information (For U.K. only)

Important

If the mains plug supplied with this printer is not suitable for your socket

outlet, remove the plug from the mains cord and fit an appropriate three

pin plug. If the replacement plug is intended to take a fuse then fit the

same rating fuse as the original.

If a moulded plug is severed from the mains cord then it should be

destroyed because a plug with cut wires is dangerous if engaged in a live

socket outlet. Do not leave it where a child might find it!

USER’S GUIDE

xviii

In the event of replacing the plug fuse, fit a fuse approved by ASTA to

BS1362 with the same rating as the original fuse.

Always replace the fuse cover. Never use a plug with the cover omitted.

WARNING - THIS PRINTER MUST BE EARTHED

The wires in the mains cord are coloured in accordance with the

following code :

GREEN AND YELLOW : EARTH

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

The colours of the wires in the mains lead of this printer may not

correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your

plug.

If you need to fit a different plug, proceed as follows.

Remove a length of the cord outer sheath, taking care not to damage the

coloured insulation of the wires inside.

Cut each of the three wires to the appropriate length. If the construction

of the plug permits, leave the green and yellow wire longer than the

others so that, in the event that the cord is pulled out of the plug, the

green and yellow wire will be the last to disconnect.

Remove a short section of the coloured insulation to expose the wires.

The wire which is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the

terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter “E” or by the safety

earth symbol , or coloured green or green and yellow.

The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which

is marked with the letter “N” or coloured black or blue.

The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter “L” or coloured red or brown.

The outer sheath of the cord must be secured inside the plug. The

coloured wires should not hang out of the plug.

xix

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (EUROPE)

We, Brother International Europe Ltd.,

Brother House 1 Tame Street, Guide Bridge,

Audenshaw, Manchester M34 5JE, UK.

declare that this product is in conformity with the following normative

documents:

Safety: EN 60950, EN 60825

EMC: EN 55022 Class B, EN 50082-1

following the provisions of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the

Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC (as amended by

91/263/EEC and 92/31/EEC).

* When used with the NC-2010h Ethernet interface card, this product

complies with EN 55022 Class A.

Issued by:

Brother International Europe Ltd.

European Technical Services Division

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

1-1

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This manual acts as your guide to the setup and operation of your printer

and covers the following topics:

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION provides an overview of the printer.

Read this chapter first to get familiar with the printer.

CHAPTER 2 SETTING UP THE PRINTER gives you general set-up

information about this printer. Be sure to read this chapter before you use

the printer.

CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER gives

you important information on the printer setup to work with your

computer and software. Be sure to read this chapter before you work with

the printer.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL details the functions of the panel

buttons and LEDs.

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE provides guidance on how to maintain

your printer.

CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING helps you troubleshoot the

printer in case of problems.

APPENDICES contain detailed technical information on the printer as

well as the character sets and a quick reference guide to the printer

control commands.

INDEX provides an alphabetical list of the contents of this manual.

✒ Notes

When you read this user’s guide, note the following:

This user’s guide contains instructions or steps to teach you various

operations of the printer. Remember that the instructions start with the

factory settings, particularly in Chapter 2 and Chapter 3. If you

change the settings, particularly the emulation mode, the display

messages change accordingly.

The paper size has been factory set to letter or A4, depending upon

the final destination of the printer. Some display messages appear

differently in accordance with this setting.

USER’S GUIDE

1-2

ABOUT THIS PRINTER

Features

This printer has the following standard features.

2400 x 600 DPI Class Resolution

This printer prints pages with a resolution of 600 dots per inch (dpi) as

default. By utilizing the 300-dpi mode, the printer can also print 300-dpi

data, if necessary. Moreover, you can get higher quality printout which is

the equivalent of 2400x600 DPI resolution printout, by utilizing HRC or

CAPT.

High Speed and Color Laser Printing

With this printer, you can print crisp printing in 24 bit brilliant full color.

This printer can print at a speed up to 16 pages per minute in

monochrome mode and 4 pages per minute in full color mode. The

controller utilizes a high speed 32-bit RISC microprocessor and special

hardware chips, so the process speed is very fast.

Color Advanced Photoscale Technology (CAPT)

This printer can print graphics in 256 shades for each color in HP® color

printer PCL5C™ emulation and BR-Script level 2, producing nearly

photographic quality. This mode is effective when you print photographic

images.

High Resolution Control (HRC)

The High Resolution Control (HRC) technology provides clear and crisp

printouts and improves even the 600-dpi resolution. This mode is

effective when you print text.

Maintenance-Free and Economical Toner Cartridge

The toner cartridge can print up to 10,000 (Black) and 6,000 (Cyan,

Magenta and Yellow) single-sided pages at 5% coverage. This printer

uses one piece, easy-to-replace toner cartridges.

Universal Media Cassette

This printer loads paper automatically from the media cassette. Since the

media cassette is a universal type, a number of different sizes of paper

can be used. Even envelopes can be loaded from the media cassette. For

detailed paper specifications, see ‘Paper Handling’ in Chapter 3.

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

1-3

Three Interfaces

This printer has a high speed bi-directional parallel interface, an RS-232C

serial interface and a modular input/output (MIO) compatible interface.

If your application software supports the bi-directional parallel interface,

you can monitor the printer status. It is fully compatible with the

industry-standard bi-directional parallel interface.

The RS-232C serial interface is an industry standard so that you can

connect it to any computer using a standard serial cable.

The MIO interface allows you to install a commercial MIO-compatible

card. If you install the card, you can use one more interface port for

features such as networking or printer sharing.

Automatic Interface Selection

This printer can automatically select the bi-directional parallel, RS-232C

serial or MIO interface depending on the interface port through which it

receives data. With this feature, the printer can be connected to more than

one computer.

Five Emulation Modes

This printer can emulate the Hewlett-Packard® Color PCL® 5C ( PCL6®

in monochrome printing) printers, PostScript® Level 2 language

emulation (Brother BR-Script Level 2) printers, the industry-standard HP-

GL™ plotter as well as EPSON® FX-850™, and IBM® Proprinter XL®

printers (in monochrome printing). You can print with all application

programs that support one of these printers.

Automatic Emulation Selection

This printer can automatically select the printer emulation mode

depending on the print commands it receives from the computer software.

With this feature, many users can share the printer on a network.

Data Compression Technology

This printer can internally compress the received graphics and font data

in its memory so that it can print larger graphics and more fonts without

additional memory.

USER’S GUIDE

1-4

Various Fonts

This printer has 75 scalable and 12 bitmapped fonts. The fonts that can be

used vary according to the current emulation mode.

Bar Code Printing

This printer can print the following 11 types of bar codes:

• Code 39 • UPC-E

• Interleaved 2 of 5 • Codabar

• EAN-8 • US-PostNet

• EAN-13 • ISBN

• UPC-A • Code 128

• EAN-128

CCITT G3/G4

Since this printer supports the CCITT G3/G4 format in addition to HP-

compatible formats, it can quickly receive and print data compressed in

this format.

Lock Panel

If the panel button settings have been changed, the printer may not work

as you expect. If you are an administrator of this printer, you can lock

your settings to prevent changes from being made.

Power Save Mode

This printer has a power saving mode. As laser printers consume power to

keep the fixing assembly at a high temperature, this feature can save

electricity when the printer is on but not being used. The factory setting

of the Power Save mode is ON so that it complies with the new EPA

Energy Star specification. Compared with conventional laser printers, this

printer consumes less power even when the power saving mode is turned

off.

Toner Save Mode

This printer has an economical toner save mode. You can cut your printer

running cost substantially by using this mode in addition to the improved

life expectancy of the toner cartridge.

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

1-5

Reprint Function

You can reprint the last print job with a touch of a panel button which

allows reprinting without sending the data again from the computer.

When there is not enough memory to print the last job out, you can

reprint the last print page.

PCMCIA Card Slot

Printer has PCMCIA card slot (TypeII:2slots, TypeIII:1slot).You can

install a PCMCIA-compatible flash memory card and HDD card.

Flash memory card: You can store fonts, macros, logos and other

print data.

HDD card: You can store fonts, macros, logos and other

print data.

Saving User Settings

You can operate the printer differently from other users with your own

panel button settings. Two sets of user settings can be stored.

USER’S GUIDE

1-6

Options The following options are available for this printer:

Lower Tray Unit

A lower tray unit expands the paper source capacity. You can load extra

paper or different sizes of paper. You can load Letter, A4, B5 (JIS and

ISO) or Executive size (176x250 to 215.9x297mm) paper and Com10,

DL size envelopes into this cassette.

Legal Cassette

When you want to print on Legal sized paper, you need to use this

cassette.

The following commercial products can be installed into this printer:

MIO Card

A commercial modular input/output (MIO) compatible sharing/network

card gives you an additional interface port for attaching the printer to a

network or sharing your printer with multiple computers.Some models of

this printer have an MIO Card for networking fitted as standard.

Flash Memory Card and HDD Card

A commercial flash memory card or an HDD card can be installed. You

can store fonts, macros, logos, and other print data in a commercial

PCMCIA-compatible flash memory card or HDD card.

RAM Expansion

Installing commercial memory modules expands the memory capacity up

to 112 Mbytes.

✒ Note

For the details about how to install the options, see the manual supplied

with the option you wish to install .

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

1-7

Operating and Storage Environment

Please take note of the following before using the printer.

Power Supply

Use the printer within the specified power range.

AC power: ±10% of the rated power voltage

Frequency: 50/60 Hz (120V or 220-240 V)

The power cord, including extensions, should not exceed 5 meters (16.5

feet).

Do not share the same power circuit with other high-power appliances,

particularly an air conditioner, copier, shredder, etc. If it is unavoidable

that you must use the printer with these appliances, we recommend you

use a voltage transformer or a high-frequency noise filter.

Use a voltage regulator if the power source is not stable.

Environment

Use the printer only within the following ranges of temperature and

humidity.

Ambient temperature: 10°C to 32.5°C (50°F to 90.5°F)

Ambient humidity: 20% to 80% (without condensation)

Do not block the air exit on top of the printer. Do not place objects on top

of the printer, especially on the air exit.

Ventilate the room where you use the printer.

Do not place the printer where it is exposed to direct sunlight. Use a blind

or a heavy curtain to protect the printer from direct sunlight if the printer

is unavoidably set up near a window.

Do not install the printer near devices that contain magnets or generate

magnetic fields.

Do not subject the printer to strong physical shocks or vibrations. Do not

expose the printer to open flames or salty or corrosive gasses.

Place the printer on a flat, horizontal surface.

Keep the printer clean. Do not install the printer in a dusty place.

Do not install the printer near an air conditioner.

USER’S GUIDE

1-8

The following figure shows the suitable spacing around the printer for

operation and maintenance.

Front

Rear

Fig. 1-1 Suitable Spacing around the Printer

✒ Note

Ensure that there is enough space at the rear of the printer so that you can

easily access the rear cover if a paper jam occurs.

CHAPTER 2 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

2–1

CHAPTER 2

SETTING UP THE PRINTER

This chapter works as a quick setup guide, which gives you information for setting up

the printer.

BEFORE USING THE PRINTER

Warning

This printer is heavy and weighs approximately 36kg (79.37lbs).

When you move or lift this printer, be sure to do so with at least 2

people so that you will not hurt your back.

Checking the Components

After unpacking the printer, check to see that you have all of the

following parts.

Fig. 2-1 Components in the Printer Carton

Caution

The Toner Cartridges, (OPC) Belt cartridge, Oil Bottle and Fuser Cleaner

are packed inside a separate carton as a starter kit. Do not open them now.

Only open them immediately before you want to install them. The (OPC)

Belt Cartridge must not be exposed to light for a long time or damage will

occur.

Printer

Standard Media

Cassette

(pre-installed)

Power Cord

User’s Guide Printer Driver

Disks

Toner Cartridges

(Black, Cyan,

Magenta and

Yellow)

Oil Bottle

(OPC) Belt

Cartridge

Fuser Cleaner

Oil Syringe

USER’S GUIDE

2–2

✒ Note

An interface cable is not a standard accessory. Please purchase an

appropriate cable according to the interface you intend to use (parallel

cables should not exceed 1.8meters(6 feet)). The power cord may differ

slightly from this diagram depending on the country where you purchased

the printer.

✒ Note

You may have additional parts not listed above depending on which

country you live in and theHL-2400C series model you have bought.

✒ Note

We recommend you keep a spare of the following consumables at all

times, because when the following consumables reach their life, the

printer stops printing.

* Toner Cartridges (TN-01BK, TN-01C, TN-01M, TN-01Y)

* Waste Toner Pack (WT-1CL)

* Oil Bottle and Fuser Cleaner (FO-1CL, CR-1CL)

CHAPTER 2 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

2–3

General View

Fig. 2-2 Front View

Fig. 2-3 Rear View

Control Panel

Top Cover

Front Cover

Media Cassette

Power Button

Rear Side Cover

Rear Access

Cover Power Cord

Connector

Controller Box

USER’S GUIDE

2–4

SETTING UP THE PRINTER

Removing the Protective Parts

After checking that you have all of the correct parts, temporarily place the

printer where you can easily reach all sides. Remove the protective parts

that secure the printer against damage during transportation, as shown

below:

✒ Note

Keep all packing materials for transporting or storing the printer later.

1. Remove the protective parts as shown below.

Fig. 2-4 Removing the Protective Parts

CHAPTER 2 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

2–5

Installing the (OPC) Belt Cartridge

Caution

Do not touch the green surface of the (OPC) Belt Cartridge . If you

do, it might cause quality reduction.

Do not expose the (OPC) Belt to light (more than 800 lux) for more

than approximately 2 minutes. It might cause damage to the (OPC)

Belt Cartridge and void its warranty.

1. Open the Top Cover with the Front Cover open.

Fig. 2-5 Open the Covers

2. Release both green Belt Cartridge Lock Levers by pulling them

toward you.

Fig. 2-6 Release the Levers

USER’S GUIDE

2–6

3. Remove the orange (OPC) Belt Tension Release Pins.

Fig. 2-7 Remove the Pins

4. Remove the Protective Sheet from the (OPC) Belt Cartridge.

Fig. 2-8 Remove the Protective Sheet

5. Insert the (OPC) Belt cartridge into the printer along the guide with

the flat side facing toward you.

Fig. 2-9 Insert the (OPC) Belt Cartridge

6. Lock the Belt Cartridge Lock Levers by pushing them backwards until

you feel them click.

7. Close the Top Cover.

CHAPTER 2 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

2–7

Installing the Toner Cartridges

This printer uses 4 separate color (Black, Cyan, Magenta and Yellow)

toner cartridges to print. You have one of each color toner cartridge

supplied as standard. A new cartridge contains enough toner to print

approximately 10,000 (Black): 6,000 (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow) A4 or

letter-size single-sided pages at about 5% coverage. (Actual toner yield

will depend on the images being printed.)

✒ Note

The toner cartridges shipped with the printer contain only half the normal

amount of toner. (5,000 pages (Black) and 3,000 pages (Cyan, Magenta

and Yellow)).

To install the toner cartridges, follow these steps:

1. Open the Front Cover of the printer.

2. After rocking each of the cartridges 3 to 4 times, remove the orange

Protective Cover of the Toner Cartridges.

Fig. 2-10 Removing the Protective Cover

3. Install the 4 toner cartridges by positioning them in the guides. Insert

the new Toner Cartridges, making sure to insert the correct color in

the correct position referring to the color indications on the label in

the order Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and then Black.

Fig. 2-11 Install the Toner Cartridges

USER’S GUIDE

2–8

Caution

Do not stand the toner cartridge on its end or turn it upside down.

Install the toner cartridges immediately after you remove the

protective part. Do not touch the shaded part shown below.

Fig. 2-12 Toner Cartridge

CHAPTER 2 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

2–9

Installing the Oil Bottle and the Fuser Cleaner

1. Release the Fusing unit pressure a little with the Pressure Release

Levers ( ). Then pull the orange protective parts between the rollers

of the Fusing Unit out to remove them ( ). Make sure that the

Pressure Release Levers are locked.

Fig. 2-13 Remove the Protective Parts

2. Install the Oil Bottle into the Fusing Unit with the label side facing the

front of the printer.

Fig. 2-14 Install the Oil Bottle

Caution

Do not spill the oil inside the printer. If the oil does spill, it might cause

damage to the printer. If you do spill any oil, consult your dealer or our

authorized service representative.

USER’S GUIDE

2–10

3. Set the Fuser Cleaner into the Fusing Unit with the roller side facing

toward you.

Fig. 2-15 Install the Fuser Cleaner

4. Lock the Oil Bottle and the Fuser Cleaner with the Oil Bottle Lock

Levers.

Fig. 2-16 Lock the Oil Bottle Lock Levers

5. Close the Top Cover.

CHAPTER 2 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

2–11

Loading Paper in the Media Cassette

✒ Note

This printer has a 250 sheet Media Cassette as standard. An additional

Lower Tray Unit is available as an option.

Since the Media Cassette is a universal type, you can set letter, A4, ISO

B5 or executive size cut sheet paper or COM10, or DL size envelopes in

the Media Cassette.

The paper sources have the following limitations. For more information

about paper, see “Paper Handling” in Chapter 3.

paper source available size available type and

capacity

Standard

Media

Cassette

cut sheet : Letter, A4, B5(ISO),

B5(JIS), Executive

envelope: COM 10, DL

other size: width 105-216mm

(4.1”-8.5”)

length 220-297mm

(8.7”-11.7”)

plain paper : 250

envelope : 15

OHP film : 50

Up to approx. 250

sheets of 75g/m2

(20 lbs.) paper

Optional

Legal Cassette cut sheet : Legal, Letter, A4,

B5(ISO), B5(JIS),

Executive

envelope: COM 10, DL

other size: width 105-216mm

(4.1”-8.5”)

length 220-355.6mm

(8.7”-14”)

plain paper : 250

envelope : 15

OHP film : 50

Up to approx. 250

sheets of 75g/m2

( 20 lbs.) paper

✒ Note

Do not load envelopes in the Paper cassette in the Optional Lower Tray

Unit. It might cause paper jams.

USER’S GUIDE

2–12

Follow these steps to set paper and install the Media Cassette:

✒ Note

Be sure to select the same paper size as the paper to be used from your

application software, or correct printing cannot be obtained.

If your application software does not support paper size selection in

its print menu, you can change the paper size with the Mode button in

the FORMAT MODE. For paper size change information, see

“MODE Button” in Chapter 4.

The paper size has been factory set to letter or A4, depending upon

the final destination of the printer.

•120V model: Letter size paper set.

•220/240V model: A4 size paper set.

Small Size Setting: See “Control Panel” in Chapter 4

Load paper into the Media Cassette as follows:

1. Pull the Media Cassette out of the printer.

Fig. 2-17 Removing the Media Cassette

CHAPTER 2 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

2–13

2. Adjust the Paper Guides according to the paper size you want to load.

Hold the shaded parts below and move the guides.

Fig. 2-18 Adjust the Paper Guides

3. Load paper into the Media Cassette.

✒ Note

Do not load more than 250 sheets of paper (75 g/m2or 20 lbs.) in the

cassette, or paper jams may occur. Paper (75 g/m2 or 20 lbs.) should be

loaded up to the lines on the sliding guide.

PAPER

OHP FILM

Fig. 2-19 Paper Lines

4. Install the Media Cassette into the printer.

USER’S GUIDE

2–14

Connecting the Printer to Your Computer

This printer has a bi-directional parallel interface and an RS-232C serial

interface. They allow the printer to communicate with IBM/PC® or

compatible computers. Before connecting the printer and computer, you

need to purchase a connecting cable specifically made for the interface to

be used

Since the automatic interface selection mode has been factory set, simply

connect the interface cable to the printer. In some cases, you need to turn

off the high-speed and bi-directional parallel communications with the

Mode button. For further information, see “MODE Button” in Chapter 4.

When you use the serial interface, you need to have the same

communications settings on both the printer and computer. Since the

automatic interface selection mode has been factory set with certain

factory settings (baud rate = 9600, code type = 8 bits, parity = none, stop

bit = 1, Xon/Xoff = ON, DTR (ER) = ON, and Robust Xon = ON), you

may simply connect the interface cable if these are the same as the

settings on your computer. When necessary, set the communications

parameters with the Mode button on the printer. For further information,

see “MODE Button” in Chapter 4. For the settings on the computer, see

the manual of the computer or software you use.

Connect the printer to your computer as follows:

1. Make sure that both the computer and the printer are turned off.

Caution

Always turn off the printer and computer when connecting and

disconnecting the cable.

2. Connect one end of the interface cable to the interface connector

located on the back of the printer.

CHAPTER 2 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

2–15

3.Secure the connection with wire clips or screws on the printer.

Computer Printer

Fig. 2-20 Connecting the Printer and Computer

4.Connect the other end of the interface cable to the interface connector

on your computer. Be sure to secure the connection on the computer

also.

✒ Note

When you connect to a network, refer to the Network User’s Guide.

Serial Interface Port

Secure connection with screws.

Parallel Interface Port

Secure connection with wire clips.

USER’S GUIDE

2–16

Turning the Printer On

Plugging in the Power Cord and Turn the Printer On

1. Make sure that the Power button is turned OFF: the button is on the

front left hand side of the printer.

2. Attach the power cord to the printer and plug it into an appropriate

AC outlet.

Fig. 2-21 Plugging in the Power Cord

3. Turn the printer on by pressing the Power Button.

Caution

Check the AC voltage. This printer should be operated at the specified

voltage and frequency.

• USA and Canada: AC 120 V, 50/60 Hz

• Europe, Australia and others: AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Since this printer must be electrically grounded, the power cord

should be connected to a grounded AC outlet.

The total length of the power cord, including extension cords, should

not exceed 5 meters (16.4 feet). Use of a longer power cord may result

in reduced voltage or malfunctions.

Do not unplug the power cord to turn off the printer.

The printer should be installed near a power outlet which is easily

accessible.

CHAPTER 2 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

2–17

Caution

Always wait at least 5 seconds after turning off the power before turning

it back on.

Do not turn the power off while the printer is printing as this may cause a

paper jam and adversely affect the printer.

The printer performs a self-diagnosis at start-up to check its hardware and

software. If the printer should find any problems, the display will change

to show the corresponding error message. See “TROUBLESHOOTING”

in Chapter 6.

The display shows several messages quickly at start-up. If the printer

detects no errors, it automatically goes on-line and the message changes

to show the current printer status and settings as shown below.

LJ READY 001P T1

AUTO    

K C M Y

AUTO: The auto emulation selection mode is set.

LJ : The auto emulation selection is set and currently the HP

PCL5C emulation is selected.

READY : The printer is ready to print.

001 : The number of copies to print is set to 1.

P : Portrait print is selected.

T1 : Paper is fed from Tray1.

: Toner cartridges are full. When the toner cartridges become

nearly empty, the indication blinks. The indication

disappears when a color toner is empty.

USER’S GUIDE

2–18

Printing the Test Patterns or Lists

You can check print quality and print a list of available fonts before you

actually start working with the printer. To do so, follow these steps:

1. Make sure that you have already installed the toner cartridges, the

(OPC) Belt Cartridge, the Oil Bottle and the Fuser Cleaner and have

loaded paper into the cassette. Make sure that you have removed the

protective parts on the Waste Toner Pack.

2 Turn on the printer. Wait until the display shows the message as

follows.

LJ READY 001P T1

AUTO    

K C M Y

3. Press the Sel button to set the printer off-line.

The On Line LED goes off.

4. Hold down the Shift button and press the Test button.

5. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to scroll through the display until the desired

message appears. To print your selection, press the Set button.

Choose from one of the following selections :

To Print Out LCD Message in the Second Row

the Demonstration Page DEMO PAGE

the Test Pattern TEST PRINT

the list of printer settings PRINT CONFIG

the list of internal or resident fonts PRINT FONTS I

the list of optional cartridge/card fonts PRINT FONTS C

the list of permanent download fonts PRINT FONTS P

To exit from the test mode, select “exit”.

✒ Notes

The messages “PRINT FONTS C” or “PRINT FONTS P” appear only

when an optional font cartridge/card is installed in the font slot or

permanent download fonts are stored in printer memory respectively.

If the optional font cartridge/card is installed, you can print out a list

of optional fonts. Since the list shows the ID numbers specific to each

optional font, it helps you to select them with the Font button. For

further information, see “FONT Button” in Chapter 4.

If user-defined characters are already downloaded into the printer

memory as permanent download fonts, you can print out a list of

them. For further information, see “FONT Button” in Chapter 4.

CHAPTER 2 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

2–19

6. Press the Set button.

The printer starts printing the selected test pattern or list. When the

printer finishes printing, it automatically exits to the off-line state.

!"#$%&'()*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz[|

"#$%&'()*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}

#$%&'()*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~

$%&'()*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!

%&'()*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"

&'()*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#

'()*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$

()*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%

)*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&

*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'

+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'(

,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()

-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*

./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+

/1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,

1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-

234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-.

34567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-./

4567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-./1

567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-./12

67890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-./123

7890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-./1234

890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-./12345

90:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-./123456

ABC

TEST PRINT

PRINT CONFIGURAITION(1/2)

(LJ):HP LaserJet 4 (BS):BR-Script 2 (GL):HP-GL

(FX):EPSON FX-850 (PR):IBMProprinterXL

PAGE COUNTER = 682

RAM SIZE = 10Mbyte

USER SETTINGS SETTING1 SETTING2

< EMULATION >

EMULATION AUTO LaserJet4 AUTO LaserJet4 AUTO LaserJet4

AUTO TIME OUT (S) 5 5 5

EPSON/IBM EPSON EPSON EPSON

KEEP PCL OFF OFF OFF

< MODE >

- INTERFACE MODE -

I/F PARALLEL <- <-

AUTO TIME OUT (S) 5 <- <-

PRL SETTING

HIGH SPEED ON <- <-

BI-DIR ON <- <-

RS-232C SETTING

BaundRate (BAUD) 9600 <- <-

CodeType (bits) 8 <- <-

Parity NONE <- <-

Stop Bit (bits) 1 <- <-

Xon/Xoff ON <- <-

DTR(ER) ON <- <-

Robust Xon OFF <- <-

- FORMAT MODE -

ORIENTATION PORTRAIT <- <-

AUTO MODE

(LJ)

AUTO LF OFF OFF OFF

AUTO CR OFF OFF OFF

AUTO WRAP OFF OFF OFF

AUTO SKIP ON ON ON

(FX)

AUTO LF OFF OFF OFF

AUTO MASK OFF OFF OFF

(PR)

AUTO LF OFF OFF OFF

AUTO CR OFF OFF OFF

AUTO MASK OFF OFF OFF

PAGE FORMAT MODE

X OFFSET (dots) 0 <- <-

Y OFFSET (dots) 0 <- <-

PAPER A4 A4 A4

(LJ)

LEFT M (C) 0 0 0

RIGHT M (C) 78 78 78

TOP M (") 0.5 0.5 0.5

BOTTOM M (") 0.5 0.5 0.5

LINES (L) 64 64 64

(FX)

LEFT M (C) 0 0 0

RIGHT M (C) 80 80 80

TOP M (") .33 .33 .33

BOTTOM M (") .33 .33 .33

LINES (L) 66 66 66

(PR)

LEFT M (C) 0 0 0

RIGHT M (C) 80 80 80

TOP M (") .33 .33 .33

BOTTOM M (") .33 .33 .33

LINES (L) 66 66 66

- RESOLUTION MODE -

RESOLUTION (DPI) 600 <- <-

HRC MEDIUM <- <-

TEST PRINT PRINT CONFIG

PORTRAIT LIST

INTERNAL FONT

NUMBER SYMBOL SET

(ID) PITCH SIZE STYLE WEIGHT TYPEFACE F O N T S A M P L E(600dpi)

I000 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Upright(0) Medium(0) PcTENNES Reg (4101)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/012

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v0s0b4101T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I001 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Upright(0) Bold(3) PcTENNES Bd (4101)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/01

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v0s3b4101T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I002 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Italic(1) Midium(0) PcTENNES It (4101)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/012

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s0b4101T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I003 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Italic(1) Bold(3) PcTENNES BdIt (4101)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/012

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s3b4101T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I004 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Upright(0) Medium(0) OKLAHOMA Reg (4113)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/0

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v0s0b4113T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I005 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Upright(0) Bold(3) OKLAHOMA Bd (4113)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/0

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v0s3b4113T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I006 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Italic(1) Medium(0) OKLAHOMA It (4113)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/0

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s0b4113T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I007 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Italic(1) Bold(3) OKLAHOMA BdIt (4113)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/0

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s3b4113T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I008 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Italic(1) Medium(0) CONNECTICUT (4116)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/0123456

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s0b4116T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I009 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Upright(4) Bold(3) CLEVELAND Cd (4140)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v4s3b4140T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I010 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Upright(0) Light(-3) PcBRUSSEL Lt (4143)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v0s-3b4143T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I011 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Upright(0) Bold(2) PcBRUSSEL Bd (4143)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v0s2b4143T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I012 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Italic(1) Light(-3) PcBRUSSEL LtIt(4143)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s-3b4143T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I013 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Italic(1) Bold(2) PcBRUSSEL BdIt(4143)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s2b4143T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I014 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Upright(0) Medium(0) UTAH Reg (4148)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/01

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v0s0b4148T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I015 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Upright(0) Bold(3) UTAH Bd (4148)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/0

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v0s3b4148T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I016 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Italic(1) Medium(0) UTAH It (4148)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/01

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s0b4148T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

I017 8U:ROMAN 8...

P: Scalable Italic(1) Bold(3) UTAH BdIt (4148)

ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/0

ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s3b4148T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)

ID:Symbol Set ID

PRINT FONTS I

Fig. 2-22 Test Pattern, Setting List, and Font List

*The test pattern, setting list and font list above might be changed without notice.

USER’S GUIDE

2–20

Installing the Printer Driver

Computer Requirements

The following are the minimum computer requirements to setup and

operate the printer.

CPU: 80486 or higher

(Pentium recommended)

RAM: 8 MB or more for Windows 95, 98, 3.1 / 3.11 and NT 4.0

(16 MB or more recommended)

Hard Disk Drive:10Mbyte free space available

(more space is necessary for printing)

OS: Windows 95, 98, 3.1x, NT4.0

✒ Note

Use only a shielded Interface cable that is IEEE 1284 compliant and less

than 1.8m (6 feet ) long.

Prepare Windows 95/98 for the Printer

1.Insert the supplied disk for Windows into your floppy disk drive.

2.Click the “START” button and select “Setting”.

3.Select “Printers” and double click “Add Printer”.

4.Follow the instructions in Windows 95/98.

5.Click “Have Disk”. Then browse and select “Brother HL-2400C series”.

6.Follow the rest of the Windows 95/98 instructions.

CHAPTER 2 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

2–21

Prepare Windows 3.1/3.11 for the Printer

1. Insert the supplied disk for Windows into your floppy disk drive.

2. Choose Run from the File menu in the Program Manager.

3. Type the drive name where you

inserted the supplied disk and

“SETUP” in the box: for example,

A:\SETUP. Choose the OK button or

press the Enter key.

4. The installer starts running. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

✒ Notes

The installer automatically updates your SYSTEM.INI Windows file

by adding DEVICE=bi-di.386 under the [386Enh] section. If any bi-

directional parallel communications device driver has previously been

installed, it will be deactivated by this new driver. If you want to use

the driver that was previously installed, you should re-install your

previous driver. However, re-installing the previous driver will make

the HL-2400C driver inactive.

The installer makes the installed printer driver the Windows default.

The installer automatically sets the printer port to the parallel

interface, LPT1.

During this installation, changes have been made to the SYSTEM.INI

file. It is necessary to restart Windows so that the changes become

effective and the installed bi-directional parallel communications

device driver can take effect.

USER’S GUIDE

2–22

Prepare Windows NT 4.0 for the Printer

1. Insert the supplied disk for Windows into your floppy disk drive.

2. Click the “START” button and select “Setting”.

3. Select “Printers” and double click “Add Printer”.

4. Follow the instructions in Windows NT.

5. Click “Have Disk”. Then browse and select “Brother HL-2400C series”.

6. Follow the rest of the Windows NT instructions.

✒ Notes

For installation of other printer drivers and information on the latest

printer drivers see: http://www.brother.com

CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER

3–1

CHAPTER 3

BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER

AUTOMATIC EMULATION SELECTION

This printer has an automatic emulation selection function. When the

printer receives data from the computer, it automatically selects the

emulation mode. This function has been factory set to ON.

The printer can select the emulation among the following combinations:

EPSON/IBM Priority EPSON (default) IBM

Auto Selection Mode HP PCL 5C HP PCL 5C

BR-Script 2 BR-Script 2

HP-GL HP-GL

EPSON FX-850 IBM Proprinter XL

To get the most out of this laser printer, we recommend you use the HP

color printer emulation (PCL5C) mode automatically. Since PCL5C

mode takes the highest priority in the automatic emulation selection, you

can start using the printer as it is with the factory settings in most cases.

When the automatic emulation selection is active, you can check the

current emulation on the display. When the printer is in ready, print, or

wait states, the display reads as follows:

Emulation Status Display in Ready State

HP PCL5C LJ READY 001P T1

BR-Script 2 BS IDLE 001P T1

HP-GL GL READY 001P T1

EPSON FX-850 FX READY 001P T1

IBM Proprinter XL PR READY 001P T1

✒ Notes

Emulation modes other than PCL5C and BR-Script 2 are monochrome

emulation modes.

To select the emulation mode manually, use the Emulation button. For

further information, see “EMULATION Button” in Chapter 4.

USER’S GUIDE

3–2

✒ Notes

When you use the automatic emulation selection, note the following:

Once the emulation is automatically changed, it is not changed again

for a short period of time. This time period is called “Time Out” and it

can be set with the Emulation button. The factory setting is 5

seconds.

The EPSON or IBM emulation mode priority must be selected, as the

printer cannot distinguish between them. Since the factory setting is

the EPSON emulation mode, you might need to select the IBM

emulation mode with the Emulation button when you need to use

this emulation..

Try this function with your application software or network server. If

the function does not work properly, select the required emulation

mode manually using the printer panel buttons or use emulation

selection commands from your software.

CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER

3–3

AUTOMATIC INTERFACE SELECTION

This printer has an automatic interface selection function. When the

printer receives data from the computer, it automatically selects the bi-

directional parallel, RS-232C serial interface or MIO interface as

appropriate.

When you use the parallel interface, you can turn the high-speed and bi-

directional parallel communications on or off with the Mode button. For

further information, see “MODE Button” in Chapter 4. Since the

automatic interface selection mode has been factory set to ON, simply

connect the interface cable to the printer.

When you use the serial interface, you need to have the same

communications settings on both the printer and computer. Since the

automatic interface selection mode has been factory set with certain

settings, you may be able to simply connect the interface cable to the

printer if your computer has the settings listed below.

Communications Parameters Factory Settings

Baud rate (data transfer speed) 9600

Code type (data length) 8 bits

Parity (data error check) None

Stop bit (data separator) 1 stop bit

Xon/Xoff (handshake protocol) ON

DTR (ER) ON

Robust Xon OFF

If a commercial interface card has been installed in the MIO card slot, it

can be selected automatically.

When necessary, select the interface or the serial communications

parameters manually with the Mode button (INTERFACE MODE) on

the printer. For further information, see “MODE Button” in Chapter 4.

For the settings on the computer, see the manual of the computer or

application software you are using.

USER’S GUIDE

3–4

✒ Notes

When you use the automatic interface selection, note the following:

Once the interface is automatically changed, it is not changed again

for a short period of time. This time period is called “Time Out” and it

can be set with the Mode button. The factory setting is 5 seconds.

The communications parameters [ baud rate, code type, parity, stop

bit, Xon/Xoff, DTR(ER), and Robust Xon] must be set for the serial

interface. Although they have been factory set as shown in the above

table, you may need to change them with the Mode button.

This function takes a few seconds to work. If you want to speed up

printing, select the required interface manually with the Mode button.

If you constantly use only one interface, we recommend that you select

that interface in the interface mode. The printer allocates all of the input

buffer to that interface if only one interface is selected.

CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER

3–5

ABOUT THE CONTROL PANEL

Selecting the Local Language Display

The display usually shows the current printer status. When you operate

the control panel buttons, it shows functions and settings. If any trouble

occurs, it shows the corresponding error message. You can see these

messages in several languages. The default language is English.

• English • German • Spanish

• French • Dutch • Italian

To change to another language:

1. Turn off the printer.

2. Hold down the Form Feed button and turn on the printer.

The message “SELF TEST” appears and then the message changes to

“LANG.=ENGLISH * ”.

3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button until your desired language appears on the

display.

4. Press the Set button to make the selected language messages

effective.

An asterisk (*) appears at the end of the display for a short time, and

then the printer automatically returns to the on-line state with the

selected language message on the display.

USER’S GUIDE

3–6

Using the Panel Buttons

The printer has a versatile control panel. It has two operation modes:

When you press the buttons, they work in the NORMAL mode as

indicated above the buttons. When you press the buttons with the Shift

button held down, they work in the SHIFT mode as indicated below the

buttons. You can control the basic printer operations and make various

printer settings in the NORMAL and SHIFT modes.

For further information, see “BUTTONS IN NORMAL MODE” and

“BUTTONS IN SHIFT MODE” in Chapter 4.

Copy Pages Orientation Feeder

Emulation Mode K YMCToner

Ready

Alarm

Mode

Continue

Emulation Economy

Test

Shift Copy

Reset

Font

Set

On Line Data

Feeder

Sel Form Feed

Display – Shows various messages.

READY – Lights when the printer is ready to print.

ON LINE – Lights when the printer is in the on-

line state.

DATA – Blinks when data is being received and

lights when unprinted data remains in printer

memory.

SEL – Selects on-line or off-line state.

FORM FEED – Prints out remaining data or

reprints the same print job or page.

FEEDER – Selects paper source and media type

to be used.

ALARM – Lights if any errors occur.

MODE – Sets functions in various modes.

FONT – Selects font and character set.

▲ (UP) – Forward scroll through modes and

settings.

EMULATION – Selects printer emulation.

ECONOMY – Selects toner save or power save

mode.

TEST – Prints self-test pattern or fonts.

CONTINUE – Ignores the error and resumes

operation.

SET – Sets selected mode and functions.

▼ (DOWN) – Reverse scroll through modes and

settings.

SHIFT – Shifts button operation.

COPY – Sets the number of copies to print.

RESET – Resets printer or restores to factory

settings.

Fig. 3-1 Button Operation in NORMAL and SHIFT Modes

✒ Note

When the printer is used in the BR-Script 2 mode, some buttons are not

used.

CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER

3–7

Printer Settings

You may operate the printer with the panel button settings unchanged.

They have been factory set. When necessary, change and store them in

the printer memory as user settings.

There are two types of printer settings available on this printer:

1. User Settings

2. Factory Settings

Remember that the User Settings override the Factory Settings. The User

Settings are effective until other settings are made or they are restored to

the Factory Settings.

User Settings

Although the printer settings have been factory set, you can change them

with the control panel buttons. Since this printer has a memory, you can

store the panel button settings in the memory as “User Settings.” They

are recalled every time you turn on the printer.

In addition to the current settings, you can save two more sets of User

Settings with the Mode button and restore them with the Reset button.

The current settings are cleared after restoring one of the saved user

settings.

Factory Settings

The printer settings have been set at the factory before shipment. They

are called “Factory Settings.” Although you can operate the printer with

these factory settings unchanged, you can tailor the printer by making

User Settings.

✒ Note

Changing the User Settings does not affect Factory Settings. You cannot

modify the preset Factory Settings.

The changed User Settings can be restored to the factory default settings

with the Reset button. For further information, see “RESET Button” in

Chapter 4.

USER’S GUIDE

3–8

PAPER HANDLING

Print Media

Paper Size

1. The Standard Media Cassette

Since the Media Cassette is a universal type, you can use any of the sizes

of paper in the following list. The cassette can hold up to 250 sheets of

paper (75 g/m2 or 20 lbs.) or up to 15 envelopes (Paper should only be

loaded up to the arrow head marked on the sliding guide).

• Plain paper from 105 mm x 220 mm (4.1” x 8.7”) to 216 mm x 297

mm (8.5” x 11.7”) [Weight = 60 to 160 g/m2 (16 to 43 lbs)]

• Overhead projector (OHP) films (up to 50 sheets can be loaded)

• Envelopes of COM10, DL size

2. The Optional Legal Cassette

The cassette can hold up to 250 sheets of paper (75 g/m2 or 20 lbs.). If

you want to print on legal size paper, you need to use this cassette.

• Plain paper from 105 mm x 220 mm (4.1” x 8.7”) to 216 mm x 355.6

mm (8.5” x 14”) [Weight = 60 to 160 g/m2 (16 to 43 lbs)]

• Overhead projector (OHP) films (up to 50 sheets can be loaded)

• Envelopes of COM10, DL size

The following are the specifications of paper suitable for this printer.

Item Recommended

paper

specification

Xerox 4024 Hammermill

Laserprint

Basis Weight (g/m2) 82±5 75±4 90±4

Thickness (µ/m) 95±6 102±6 105±6

Smoothness (Bekk) 90±20 35±4 120±20

Stiffness (Clark) 100±15 100±15 90±15

Surface Resistance X109()10

10-1011 10-100 10-100

CIE LAB L* ——— 94±2 94±2

CIE LAB a* ——— 0.4±1 -0.5±1

CIE LAB b* ——— 1.6±1 2.2±1

Brightness (%) 85±2 80±2 85±2

Grain Direction Long Long Long

* Back side of paper

CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER

3–9

paper source available size available type and

capacity

Standard

Media

Cassette

cut sheet : Letter, A4, B5(ISO),

B5(JIS), Executive

envelope: COM 10, DL

other size: width 105-216mm

(4.1”-8.5”)

length 220-297mm

(8.7”-11.7”)

plain paper : 250

envelope : 15

OHP film : 50

Up to approx. 250

sheets of 75g/m2

(20 lbs.) paper

Optional

Legal Cassette cut sheet : Legal, Letter, A4,

B5(ISO),B5(JIS),

Executive

envelope: COM 10, DL

other size: width 105-216mm

(4.1”-8.5”)

length 220-355.6mm

(8.7”-14”)

plain paper : 250

envelope : 15

OHP film : 50

Up to approx. 250

sheets of 75g/m2

( 20 lbs.) paper

Recommended Paper

The recommended paper type for this printer is:-

Xerox 4024 20lb Letter, Hammermill Laserprint or equivalent

✒ Note

To get the best output quality and to avoid any damage, use smooth

white paper.

It is recommended that you test paper, especially special sizes and

types of paper, on this printer before purchasing large quantities.

Print quality will vary depending on the paper being used.

✒ Note

Do not load envelopes in the Paper cassette in the Optional Lower Tray

Unit. It might cause paper jams.

USER’S GUIDE

3–10

Printable Area

The Printable Area depends on the settings in your application. The figure

below shows the physically printable area and non guaranteed print area

of various paper types with this printer.

Fig. 3-2 Printable Area and Non Guaranteed Print Area

✒ Note

If you use paper which is not a direct equivalent for the specified paper,

the life of the various consumables and parts may be reduced.

CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER

3–11

Using Envelopes

Avoid using envelopes with the following characteristics:

• Glossy or shiny surfaces

• Protection cover on the envelopes’ adhesive parts

• Sealing flaps that have not been folded at purchase

• Sealing flaps as shown below

• Three or more layers of paper in the marked area

• Each side folded as shown below

Fig. 3-3 Envelope Information

USER’S GUIDE

3–12

Before loading envelopes in the cassette, check the following:

• Envelopes should have a lengthwise sealing flap.

• The sealing flaps should be crisply and correctly folded (irregularly

cut or folded envelopes may cause paper jams).

• Envelopes should consist of two layers of paper in the following

marked area.

Fig. 3-4 Envelopes

• Envelope joints that are sealed by the manufacturer should be secure.

• All sides should be properly folded without any wrinkles or creases.

• Print quality may vary between different style envelopes. It may be

necessary to test the envelopes you wish to use prior to purchasing

large quantities.

Feeding Direction

CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER

3–13

Cassette Feed

The printer can feed paper from the Media Cassette, Optional Lower

Media Cassette or Optional Legal Cassette.

✒ Notes

When you load paper into the Media Cassette, note the following:

If your application software supports paper size selection on the print

menu, you can select it through the software. If your application

software does not support it, you can set the paper size with the printer

driver or with the Mode button on the control panel.

The paper size has been factory set to letter for 120V models or A4

for 220/240V models. If you want to use other sizes of paper or

envelopes, change the paper size in the PAGE FORMAT MODE of

the FORMAT MODE with the Mode button. For paper size selection,

see “MODE Button” in Chapter 4.

If you use pre-printed paper in the cassettes, please note that the paper

should be loaded with the printed side face up and the top of the paper

to the back of the cassette.

You can set the paper size for the Media Cassette with the Mode button

in the PAGE FORMAT mode. The printer automatically detects the paper

size you set in the Media Cassette. If you load a different size of paper in

the Media Cassette from the size selected with the Mode button or

through your application software, the printer prompts you to set the

proper size of paper as follows:

T1 LOAD PAPER

**** SIZE

( **** indicates the paper size you have selected with the Mode

button in the PAGE FORMAT mode or through your application

software.)

USER’S GUIDE

3–14

Manual Feed

This printer has no manual feed tray or multi purpose tray. Therefore you

cannot feed irregular sized paper in the usual way. However, this printer

has a special manual feed mode using Tray 1 ( upper tray) to overcome

this inconvenience.

1. When the manual feed command is selected, the printer waits until

you place the paper for printing in Tray 1, as in the usual manual feed

mode operation.

T1 MANUAL FEED

**** SIZE

2. Pull out Tray 1 and place the paper you are going to print into the

tray. It will be necessary to remove some or all of the paper stack first,

depending on the size of paper in the tray and the size of the paper

you wish to print manually.

3. Re-install Tray 1 and press the Continue button. The printer then

starts printing.

✒ Note

• Print quality might be affected by the type of paper you use and the

print image.

• You may experience poor paper feeding during Duplex printing.

• This machine is not designed for continuous Duplex printing.

• When you do manual duplex printing, if you leave the printer for

more than 5 minutes after you finished printing the first side, the

printer will reset the function automatically.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–1

CHAPTER 4

CONTROL PANEL

DISPLAY AND LEDS

This printer has one liquid crystal display (LCD) and four LEDs on the

control panel. The display can show various messages with up to 16

characters in two rows. The LEDs light to indicate the current printer

status.

Copy Pages Orientation Feeder

Emulation Mode K YMCToner

Ready

Alarm

Mode

Continue

Emulation Economy

Test

Shift Copy

Reset

Font

Set

On Line Data

Feeder

Sel Form Feed

Fig. 4-1 Display and LEDs

Display

The display usually shows the current printer status and emulation mode

setting and toner status. When you operate the control panel, you can

change settings interactively on the display.

When you turn the printer off-line, the display changes to show the

currently selected emulation and informs you that you can make settings

in the current emulation.

If any problems occur, the display shows the corresponding operator call,

error, or service call message to prompt you to take an action. For more

information on these messages, see “TROUBLESHOOTING” in Chapter

USER’S GUIDE

4–2

Printer Status Messages (on the upper row)

The following table shows the printer status messages that are displayed

during normal operation:

Printer Status Message Meaning

00 READY 001P T1 The printer is ready to print.

00 IDLE 001P T1 The printer is idle. (BR-Script 2 mode only)

AUTO PCL5C The printer is off-line and currently in HP

PCL5C mode under AUTO emulation

mode selection.

HP PCL5C The printer is off-line and in HP PCL5C

mode under HP LaserJet emulation mode

selection.

00 BUSY 001P T1 The printer is busy. (BR-Script 2 mode

only)

00 SLEEP 001P T1 The printer is in sleep status (power save

mode).

01 PRINT 001P T1 The printer is printing.

01 PR300 001P T1 The printer is printing by decreasing the

resolution from 600 dpi to 300 dpi because

of insufficient memory.

02 WAIT 001P T1 The printer is warming up.

04 SELF TEST The printer is performing self-diagnosis.

05 TEST PRINT The printer is printing the test pattern.

06 DEMO PAGE The printer is printing the demonstration.

06 PRINT CONFIG The printer is printing the list of the current

printer settings.

06 PRINT FONTS I The printer is printing the list of the internal

or resident fonts.

06 PRINT FONTS C The printer is printing the list of the

optional fonts stored in an installed font

cartridge/card.

06 PRINT FONTS P The printer is printing the list of the

permanent download fonts.

06 CARD1 PRINT The printer is printing the contents of a

flash memory card in slot 1.

06 CARD2 PRINT The printer is printing the contents of a

flash memory card or HDD card in slot 2.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–3

Printer Status Message Meaning (Continued)

07 FF PAUSE The printer has suspended feeding forms.

Pressing the Sel button resumes form feed.

08 RESET TO The printer is restoring itself to the

USER SETTINGS user settings you selected with the panel

buttons. (The message appears only

momentarily.)

08 RESET TO The printer is restoring itself to the user 1

SETTING 1 settings.

08 RESET TO The printer is restoring itself to the user 2

SETTING 2 settings.

09 RESET TO The printer is restoring itself to the

FACTORY SETTINGS factory settings. (The message appears only

momentarily.)

Now initializing The printer is initializing the MIO card or

initializing the printer for BR-Script 2

emulation.

09 RESET The printer has reset the Fuser Cleaner life

FC ROLLER LIFE counter.

09 RESET The printer has reset the (OPC) Belt

OPC BELT LIFE Cartridge life counter.

09 RESET The printer has reset the Fusing Unit life

FUSER UNIT LIFE counter.

09 RESET The printer has reset the 120K Kit life

120K KIT LIFE counter.

USER’S GUIDE

4–4

Status

Emulation Mode

AUTO: Auto emulation selection

PCL5C: HP PCL5C fixed

BRScript: BR-Script fixed

HP-GL: HP HP-GL fixed

FX-850: Epson FX-850 fixed

Pro.XL: IBM Proprinter XL

LJ PRINT 002 L T1

AUTO ■ ■ ■ ■

K C M Y

Copy Pages Orientation

“P”... Portrait

“L”... Landscape

Current Emulation

“##”... Fixed emulation expressed with double figures

“LJ”... AUTO HP PCL5C emulation

“BS”... AUTO BR-Script 2

“GL”... AUTO HP-GL emulation

“FX”... AUTO EPSON FX-850 emulation

“PR”... AUTO IBM Proprinter XL emulation

Fig. 4-2 Display

About Maintenance Messages

This printer has some maintenance parts that need replacing. The printer

counts the number of printed pages and detects the life of each of the

maintenance parts. When the life of a maintenance part comes close to it's

end, the following messages appear on the lower row of the LCD panel.

These messages will over-write the Emulation Mode status information.

Maintenance Message Meaning

   

K C M Y

When the  mark blinks (), the

indicated color toner is nearly

empty. K: Black, C: Cyan, M:

Magenta, Y: Yellow.When the

toner becomes empty the 

indication disappears.

FUSER OIL LOW Oil in the Oil Bottle is nearly

empty.

REPLACE FCR *1 Time to replace the Fuser Cleaner.

REPLACE OPC BELT *1 Time to replace the (OPC) Belt

Cartridge.

REPLACE FUSER *1 Time to replace the Fixing Unit.

REPLACE 120K KIT *1 Time to replace the Drum Cleaner,

the Paper discharger and the

Transfer Roller.

*1 - After replacing these parts, you have to reset the parts life counter so

that the printer can count the parts life correctly. See “Maintenance”

in Chapter 5.

Paper Source

“T1”... Tray 1

“T2”... Tray 2

“MN”... Manual Feed

Toner Level

: sufficient toner

(blinking ): toner nearly empty

-disappear: toner empty

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–5

LEDs

The LEDs light or blink to indicate the current printer status.

READY

LED indication Meaning

On Ready to print

Blinking Warming up

DATA

LED indication Meaning

On Data remains in the printer buffer. Pressing the

Form Feed button prints the data and clears

the buffer.

Blinking Receiving or processing data

ALARM

LED indication Meaning

On Some problem has occurred in the printer.

ON LINE

LED indication Meaning

On The printer is on-line and ready to print

Off The printer is off-line and stops printing.

USER’S GUIDE

4–6

BUTTONS IN NORMAL MODE

You can control the basic printer operations and change various printer

settings in the NORMAL mode. Functions available in the NORMAL

mode are shown above the panel buttons.

Copy Pages Orientation Feeder

Emulation Mode K YMCToner

Ready

Alarm

Mode

Continue

Font

Set

On Line Data

Sel Form Feed

Fig. 4-3 Buttons in NORMAL Mode

✒ Note

The factory settings are printed in bold in this section.

SEL Button

Pressing the Sel button changes the state of the printer between on-line

and off-line. When the printer is on-line, the On Line LED lights and the

printer is ready to receive data from the computer. When the printer is

off-line, the On Line LED is off.

To receive data from the computer, set the printer on-line. To operate the

control panel buttons, set the printer off-line.

When you press the Sel button when the printer is the on-line state, it

turns off-line and the LCD displays the current emulation.

You can enter other emulations in the AUTO emulation mode by

pressing the ▲ (UP) or ▼ (DOWN) button.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–7

✒ Notes

When you press the Sel button, remember the following:

All other buttons—except the Sel button—are operational only when

the printer is off-line.

If the printer is not in AUTO emulation mode, the LCD displays the

current emulation by pressing the Sel button to take it off-line, but

you cannot enter other emulation modes. To make settings in other

emulation modes, press the Emulation button and select the

emulation.

The Sel button works as a “quick exit” button. If you are lost in the

display menus or you want to quickly exit the display menu, press the

Sel button. You can exit quickly from any depth of the display menu

to the on-line ready state. If you have already made a setting effective

by pressing the Set button and then press the Sel button to quickly

exit, your setting (whether made by accident or on purpose) will

remain effective. Pressing the Sel button will not cancel any setting.

SET Button

Pressing the Set button allows you to select certain items on the display

or make the displayed menu or setting effective. The button also works as

an execute button to perform the displayed function.

When you press the Set button, the printer stores the settings you have

selected into the memory as “User Settings.” Every time you turn on the

printer, it is reset according to these user settings. They remain effective

until you make new settings or restore them to the factory settings. For

factory reset, see “RESET Button” in this chapter.

✒ Note

When you press the Set button to select a setting, an asterisk appears at

the end of display for a short time. Since the asterisk indicates the

selection, you can easily find the current setting when you scroll through

the display.

▲ (UP) or ▼ (DOWN) Button

Pressing ▲ (UP) or ▼ (DOWN) button scrolls the menus and settings

forward or backward respectively on the display. Press or keep pressing

the button until you access the desired item.

USER’S GUIDE

4–8

MODE Button

Pressing the Mode button allows you to enter modes where you change

settings. The mode menus and settings vary according to the current

emulation mode and options.

HP PCL5C, EPSON

FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL Modes

BR-Script Mode HP-GL Mode

INTERFACE MODE INTERFACE MODE INTERFACE MODE

Set interface, parameters. Set interface, parameters. Set interface, parameters.

FORMAT MODE FORMAT MODE FORMAT MODE

Set orientation, paper size, margins, &

others.

Set horizontal & vertical offsets. Set orientation, paper size, margins, pen

setting & others.

RESOLUTION MODE RESOLUTION MODE RESOLUTION MODE

Set resolution & HRC. Set resolution & HRC. Set resolution & HRC.

PAGE PROTECTION PAGE PROTECTION

Protect data on a page. Not available. Protect data on a page.

CARD OPERATION CARD OPERATION CARD OPERATION

Set a flash memory card or a HDD card in

HP mode.

Set a flash memory card or a HDD card Set a flash memory card or a HDD card.

ADVANCED MODE ADVANCED MODE ADVANCED MODE

Set network mode, print density, & others. Set network mode, print density, &

others.

Set network mode, print density, &

others.

PAGE COUNTER PAGE COUNTER PAGE COUNTER

Show # of printed pages. Show # of printed pages. Show # of printed pages.

exit MODE exit MODE exit MODE

Exit to off-line ready state. Exit to off-line ready state. Exit to off-line ready state.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–9

MODE Button Settings in HP PCL5C, EPSON FX-850, and IBM

Proprinter XL Modes

The following table shows all the selections you can make with the Mode

button in the HP PCL5C, EPSON FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL

modes.

✒ Note

The mode menus and settings that can appear vary according to the

current emulation mode, printer status, and any options that may be

installed in the printer.

Mode Menu Setting Menu Sub-Setting Menu Setting

INTERFACE MODE I/F=PARALLEL HIGH SPEED=ON ON or OFF

BI-DIR=ON ON or OFF

exit Exit to INTERFACE MODE

I/F=RS-232C BaudRate= 9600 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,

9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or

115200 baud

CodeType=8 bits 7 or 8 bits

Parity =NONE NONE, EVEN, or ODD

Stop Bit=1 bits 1 or 2 stop bits

Xon/Xoff=ON ON or OFF

DTR (ER)=ON ON or OFF

Robust Xon=OFF ON or OFF

exit Exit to INTERFACE MODE

I/F=EXPAND I/O Available only when a commercial MIO card has been

installed.

MIO Setting The settings available on the

installed MIO card can appear

under the sub-setting menu.

exit Exit to INTERFACE MODE

I/F=AUTO TIME OUT= 5s 1 to 99 seconds

PRL Setting Bi-directional settings for AUTO

HIGH SPEED=ON ON or OFF

BI-DIR=ON ON or OFF

exit Exit to PRL Setting

RS-232C Setting Parameters for AUTO mode

BaudRate= 9600 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,

9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or

115200 baud

CodeType=8 bits 7 or 8 bits

Parity =NONE NONE, EVEN, or ODD

Stop Bit=1 bits 1 or 2 stop bits

Xon/Xoff=ON ON or OFF

DTR (ER)=ON ON or OFF

Robust Xon=OFF ON or OFF

exit Exit to RS-232C Setting

USER’S GUIDE

4–10

Mode Menu (Continued) Setting Menu Sub-Setting Menu Setting

INTERFACE MODE

(Continued)

I/F AUTO

(Continued)

MIO Setting Available only when a commercial

MIO card has been installed. The

settings available on the installed

MIO card can appear under the sub-

setting menu.

FORMAT MODE ORIENTATION ORI=PORTRAIT PORTRAIT or LANDSCAPE

AUTO MODE AUTO LF=OFF ON … LF + CR

OFF … CR only

AUTO CR=OFF ON … LF, FF, or VT + CR

OFF … LF, FF, or VT only

AUTO WRAP=OFF ON … Auto wrap on

OFF … Auto wrap off

AUTO SKIP=ON ON … Auto FF at bottom margin

(HP mode) OFF … No FF at bottom margin

AUTO MASK=OFF ON … Auto mask on

(EPSON & IBM modes) OFF … Auto mask off

exit Exit to AUTO MODE

PAGE FORMAT MODE PAPER =LETTER

(For 120V model)

PAPER =A4

(For 220/240V model)

LETTER, LEGAL, A4, A5,

B5, EXECUTIVE, JIS B5,

COM10, C5 and DL

LEFT M = 0C 0 to 126 columns

RIGHT M = 80C

(Letter, Portrait)

10 to 136 columns

RIGHT M = 78C

(A4, Portrait)

10 to 136 columns

TOP M =0.5” (HP mode) 0, 0.33, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, or 2.0”

(0,8.4, 12.7, 25.4, 38.1 or 50.8 mm)

BOTTOM M=0.5”

(HP mode)

0, 0.33, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, or 2.0”

(0,8.4, 12.7, 25.4, 38.1 or 50.8 mm)

LINES = 60L

(HP, Letter, Portrait)

5 to 128 lines/page

LINES = 64L

(HP, A4, Portrait)

5 to 128 lines/page

X OFFSET= 0 -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots

Y OFFSET= 0 -500 (down) to +500 (up)

dots

exit Exit to PAGE FORMAT MODE

COLOR MODE COLOR PRINT = ON ON...Enable color printing

OFF...Monochrome print mode

exit Exit to FORMAT MODE

RESOLUTION MODE RESOLUTION RESOLUTION 300 or 600 dpi

HRC SETTING HRC=MEDIUM OFF, LIGHT, MEDIUM, or DARK

exit Exit to RESOLUTION MODE

PAGE PROTECTION PROTECT=AUTO AUTO, OFF, LETTER, A4, or

LEGAL

CARD OPERATION CARD1(2) When the commercial flash memory card or the HDD card has not been formatted:

(HP mode only) CARD1

CARD2

exit

FORMAT CARD Format the flash memory card or the

HDD card.

exit Exit to CARD OPERATION CARD 1(2)

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–11

Mode Menu (Continued) Setting Menu Sub-Setting Menu Setting

CARD OPERATION CARD1(2) When the commercial flash memory card or the HDD card has been formatted:

(HP mode only) EXECUTE DATA Execute the data on the card.

DATA ID=##### Execute the selected data.

exit Exit to EXECUTE DATA

CARD LIST Print the contents of the card.

SAVE SAVE DATA Send data to be saved.

SET KEY--> END End saving the data.

DATA ID=##### Set data ID for saved data.

SAVE MACRO Save a macro.

MACRO ID=##### Set macro ID for saved macro.

PRIMARY FONT Save primary font.

FONT ID=##### Set primary font ID for saved font.

SECONDARY FONT Save secondary font.

FONT ID=##### Set secondary font ID for saved

font.

DOWNLOAD FONT Save download font.

FONT ID=##### Set download font ID for saved

font.

exit Exit to CARD 1 (2) OPERATION

DELETE MACRO ID=##### Delete the selected macro.

DATA ID=#### Delete the selected data.

FONT ID=##### Delete the selected font.

FORMAT CARD Format the flash card.

SET –> DELETE ALL Execute formatting the card.

exit Exit to FORMAT CARD

exit Exit to CARD 1(2) OPERATION

ADVANCED MODE NETWORK MODE LOCK PANEL=OFF ON or OFF

PASS NO=### Enter pass number.

AUTO FF=OFF ON or OFF

WAIT TIME= 5s 1 to 99 seconds for AUTO ON

FF SUPPRESS=OFF ON or OFF

exit exit to NETWORK MODE

CONTINUE MODE CONTINUE=MANUAL AUTO or MANUAL

SCALABLE FONT FONT=ALL ALL, LJ4

INPUT BUFFER ❏❏❏❏❏ Increase or decrease the input

buffer capacity. (15 levels)

SAVE SETTINGS SAVE SETTING 1 Save the current settings as #1

SAVE SETTING 2 Save the current settings as #2

exit exit to SAVE SETTING

exit exit to ADVANCED MODE

PAGE COUNTER COUNT= 0 Shows the number of printed

pages.

exit MODE Exit MODE.

USER’S GUIDE

4–12

MODE Button Settings in BR-Script 2 Mode

The following table shows all the selections you can make with the Mode

button in the BR-Script 2 mode.

✒ Note

The mode menus and settings that can appear vary according to the

current emulation mode, printer status, and any options that may be

installed in the printer.

Mode Menu Setting Menu Sub-Setting Menu Setting

INTERFACE MODE

Same as HP PCL5C Mode

FORMAT MODE PAGE FORMAT MODE PAPER=LETTER

(For 120V model)

PAPER=A4

(For 220/240V model)

LETTER, LEGAL, A4, A5, B5,

JIS B5, EXECUTIVE, COM10, C5

and DL

X OFFSET=0 -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots

Y OFFSET=0 -500 (down) to +500 (up) dots

exit Exit to PAGE FORMAT MODE

COLOR MODE Same as PCL5C mode

exit Exit to PAGE FORMAT MODE

RESOLUTION MODE RESOLUTION RESOLUTION=600 300 or 600 dpi

CAPT SETTING CAPT=ON ON or OFF

HRC SETTING HRC=MEDIUM OFF, LIGHT, MEDIUM, or DARK

exit Exit to RESOLUTION MODE

CARD OPERATION CARD1 ( 2 ) When the commercial flash memory card or the HDD card has not been formatted:

CARD1

CARD2

exit

FORMAT CARD Format the flash memory card or

the HDD card.

exit Exit to CARD OPERATION

CARD 1 (2)

CARD OPERATION CARD1 ( 2 ) When the commercial flash memory card or the HDD card has been formatted:

CARD1 EXECUTE DATA Execute the data on the card.

CARD2 DATA ID=##### Execute the selected data.

CARD LIST Print the contents of the card.

SAVE SAVE DATA Send data to be saved.

SET KEY--> END End saving the data.

DATA ID=##### Set data ID for saved data.

exit Exit to CARD OPERATION

DELETE MACRO ID=##### Delete the selected macro.

DATA ID=#### Delete the selected data.

FONT ID=##### Delete the selected font.

FORMAT CARD Format the card.

SET –> DELETE ALL Execute formatting the card.

exit Exit to FORMAT CARD

OPERATION

exit Exit to CARD 1(2) OPERATION

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–13

Mode Menu (Continued) Setting Menu Sub-Setting Menu Setting

ADVANCED MODE NETWORK MODE LOCK PANEL=OFF ON or OFF

PASS NO=### Enter pass number.

AUTO FF=OFF ON or OFF

WAIT TIME= 5s 1 to 99 seconds for AUTO ON

FF SUPPRESS=OFF ON or OFF

exit exit to NETWORK MODE

ERROR PRINT ERROR PRINT=OFF ON or OFF

CONTINUE MODE CONTINUE=MANUAL AUTO or MANUAL

INPUT BUFFER ❏❏❏❏❏ Increase or decrease the input

buffer capacity. (15 levels)

SAVE SETTINGS SAVE SETTING 1 Save the current settings as #1

SAVE SETTING 2 Save the current settings as #2

exit exit to SAVE SETTING

exit exit to ADVANCED MODE

PAGE COUNTER COUNT= 0g25 Shows the number of printed

pages.

exit MODE Exit MODE

USER’S GUIDE

4–14

MODE Button Settings in HP-GL Mode

The following table shows all the selections you can make with the Mode

button in the HP-GL mode.

✒ Note

The mode menus and settings that can appear vary according to the

current emulation mode, printer status, and any options that may be

installed in the printer.

Mode Menu Setting Menu Sub-Setting Menu Setting

INTERFACE MODE

Same as PCL5C Mode

FORMAT MODE PAGE FORMAT MODE Same as BR=Scipt mode

GRAPHICS MODE PEN SETTING

SETTING=PEN1 PEN1 to 6

(Set size and gray

percentage for the selected

pen. )

SIZE #=3 dots 1 to 10 dots (pen size in

dots)

(# is the selected pen

number. )

GRAY #=100% 15, 30, 45, 75, 90, or 100%

(# is the selected pen

number. )

exit Exit to SETTING=PEN1–6

exit Exit to GRAPHICS MODE

CHARACTER SET

STANDARD SET Standard character set

ANSI ASCII See character setsin

ppendix

ALTERNATE SET Alternate character set

ANSI ASCII See character sets in

ppendix.

exit Exit to GRAPHICS MODE

exit Exit to FORMAT MODE

RESOLUTION MODE RESOLUTION RESOLUTION=600 300 or 600 dpi

HRC SETTING HRC=MEDIUM OFF, LIGHT, MEDIUM, or

DARK

exit Exit to RESOLUTION MODE

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–15

Mode Menu (Continued) Setting Menu Sub-Setting Menu Setting

PAGE PROTECTION PROTECT=AUTO AUTO, OFF, LETTER, A4, or

LEGAL

exit Exit to CARD OPERATION

CARD OPERATION

Same as BR-Script mode

ADVANCED MODE

Same as PCL5C mode

PAGE COUNTER COUNT= 0 Shows the number of printed

pages.

exit MODE Exit MODE

USER’S GUIDE

4–16

Basic Operation Procedures

When you operate the Mode button, remember the following basic steps:

1. Press the Sel button to set the printer off-line.

2. Press the Mode button to enter the MODE menus.

• Press the ▲ or ▼ button to scroll through the menus forward or

backward. (Pressing the Mode button allows forward scroll.)

INTERFACE MODE ▼ or ▲ FORMAT MODE

▼ or ▲ RESOLUTION MODE ▼ or ▲ …

• Press the Set button to enter the next lower menu level of the

selected menu.

Mode Menu SET Setting Menu SET Sub-Setting Menu

• Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the setting on the display.

I/F=PARALLEL ▼ or ▲ I/F=RS-232C ▼ or ▲

I/F=OPTION ▼ or ▲ …

• Press the Set button to make the selected setting effective.

When you see “exit” and press the Set button, you can exit from

the current level of menu to the next higher level of the menu.

3. Advance to “exit MODE” and press the Set button to exit from the

mode menus to the off-line ready state.

Pressing the Sel button any time in any level of the menus allows you

to exit from the mode menus to the on-line state. The settings you

have made with the Set button before exit are effective.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–17

Operation Example: Selecting the Parallel Interface

For this session, select the parallel interface manually as follows:

1. Press the Sel button to set the printer off-line.

2. Press the Mode button and then press the Set Button.

When you enter the interface mode, the display first shows the current

interface with the asterisk.

3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired interface appears on the

display.

Display Message Interface Mode

I/F=PARALLEL Parallel interface

I/F=RS-232C Serial interface

I/F=EXTEND I/O Extended I/O interface

I/F=AUTO Auto interface selection

✒ Note

The Extended I/O interface is available only when a commercial MIO

compatible sharing/network card has been installed.

Some models come with the network card pre-installed.

4. Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective.

An asterisk appears at the end of the display for a short time. Then the

printer automatically exits from the setting menu to the interface

menu.

5. Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the exit menu appears on the display.

6. Press the Set button.

Then the printer automatically returns to the off-line ready state.

USER’S GUIDE

4–18

INTERFACE MODE

The automatic interface selection has been factory set. If you want to

select a specific interface manually, use interface mode to select it.

Display Message Interface Mode

I/F=PARALLEL Parallel interface

I/F=RS-232C Serial interface

I/F=EXTEND I/O Extended I/O interface

I/F=AUTO Auto interface selection

Select the setting menu and enter the sub-setting menu to change the

setting as follows:

■ Automatic Interface Selection

When you select this function with the Set button, the display shows the

next sub-setting menu.

You need to set the time out for the auto interface selection from 1 to 99

seconds with the ▲ or ▼ button: factory setting = 5 seconds. This time

out is the duration during which the printer will not allow another

automatic change to the interface.

Even if you choose the automatic interface selection, you need to set the

communications parameters for the serial interface, high speed/bi-

directional communications for the parallel interface, and the optional

interface settings if the installed MIO card requires them. See the tables

below.

For further information about automatic interface selection, see

“AUTOMATIC INTERFACE SELECTION” in Chapter 3.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–19

■ Parallel Interface

When you use the parallel interface, you need to set the communications

mode in the following sub-setting menu.

Display Message High Speed and Bi-directional Parallel

Communications

HIGH SPEED=ON Turns on or off the high speed parallel

communications.

BI-DIR=ON Turns on or off the bi-directional parallel

communications.

The above high-speed and bi-directional settings are used for the

bi-directional parallel interface of this printer. The bi-directional parallel

interface is compatible with the IEEE 1284 standard. Although it uses the

same cable, hardware, and software as the bi-directional parallel

interface, to use its enhanced capabilities—such as bi-directional

communication between the computer and printer and faster transmission

of data—you need a printer driver or software that supports these

features. Check with your software vendor to see if your software

supports bi-directional parallel features.

■ Serial Interface

When you intend to use the serial interface, be sure to select the same

communications parameters on both the printer and computer. You must

set them for the automatic interface selection, too.

Display Message Parameters Settings

BaudRate= 9600 Baud rate

(Data transfer speed) 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,

9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200

baud

CodeType=8 bits Code type

(Data length) 7 bits or 8 bits

Parity =NONE Parity

(Data error check) None, even, or odd

Stop Bit=1 bits Stop bits

(Data separator) 1 or 2

Xon/Xoff=ON Xon/Xoff

(Handshake protocol) ON: DTR & Xon/Xoff handshake

OFF: DTR handshake only

USER’S GUIDE

4–20

Display Message Parameters Settings

DTR(ER) =ON

(Effective when

Xon/Xoff=ON)

Data terminal ready

(ER) ON: Makes DTR (ER) low when

the buffer is full.

OFF: Does not make DTR (ER)

low when the buffer is full.

DTR(ER) goes low only

when the printer is off-line.

Robust Xon =OFF

(Effective when

Xon/Xoff=ON)

Robust Xon ON: Sends Xon while waiting.

OFF: Sends Xon once, when the

printer status changes from

off-line to on-line.

■ Extended I/O Interface

If you have installed a commercial modular input/output (MIO) card in

the printer, you can select the extended I/O interface in this mode. If the

installed MIO card requires any optional interface settings, they appear

under this menu. Set them, referring to the manual of the MIO card.

✒ Note

This setting appears only when the MIO card has been installed. For

installation of the MIO card, see the Network manual.

The network card may be pre-installed on some HL-2400C series models.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–21

FORMAT MODE

ORIENTATION

When you select “ORIENTATION”, you can set portrait or landscape

orientation.

✒ Note

The ORIENTATION selection is effective in the HP PCL5C, EPSON

FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL modes. It does not work in other

emulation modes.

This printer can print pages in portrait or landscape orientation. You can

check the current orientation on the display.

Fig. 4-4 Page Orientation

When you enter the setting mode, the display first shows the current

orientation with an asterisk.

Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired orientation appears on the

display.

Display Message Orientation

ORI=PORTRAIT Portrait

ORI=LANDSCAPE Landscape

Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective.

An asterisk appears at the end of the display for a short time. Then the

printer automatically exits from the setting mode to the FORMAT

MODE.

Selection LCD message on the upper row

portrait LJ READY 001P T1

landscape LJ READY 001L T1

PORTRAIT

LANDSCAPE

USER’S GUIDE

4–22

AUTO MODE

✒ Note

The settings in this mode menu are effective in the HP PCL5C, EPSON

FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL modes. They do not appear in other

emulation modes.

The page/line termination is set in this mode.

Display Message Setting Auto Mode

AUTO LF =OFF ON CR CR+LF

OFF CR CR

AUTO CR =OFF ON LF LF+CR, FF FF+CR, VT VT+CR

OFF LF LF, FF FF, VT VT

AUTO WRAP =OFF ON Line feed and carriage return occur when the printer

position reaches the right margin.

OFF No line feed and carriage return occur when the

printer position reaches the right margin.

AUTO SKIP =ON ON Form feed occurs when the printer position reaches

the bottom margin.

OFF No form feed occurs when the printer position

reaches the bottom margin.

AUTO MASK =OFF ON The printer ignores the top and bottom margin

settings you make with the control panel. The page

length is automatically set to 11” for letter or A4-size

paper and to 14” for legal-size paper.

OFF The printer operates according to the margin settings

you make with the control panel.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–23

✒ Note on “AUTO MASK”

When you use application software in non-HP modes, be sure to set

“AUTO MASK” to ON. When you use letter- or A4-size paper, the top

and bottom 2 lines are masked and they do not appear on the printout.

The auto modes are subject to the current emulation mode.

O: The auto modes can be set.

X: The auto modes cannot be changed and no setting appears.

—: The auto modes are not available.

Printer Emulation (Factory settings in bold print)

AUTO Mode HP

PCL5C EPSON

FX-850 IBM

Proprinter XL

AUTO LF O OFF O OFF O OFF

AUTO CR O OFF X ON O OFF (Note)

AUTO WRAP O OFF X ON X ON

AUTO SKIP O ON ——

AUTO MASK —O OFF O OFF

✒ Note

In the IBM emulation mode, FF codes are always followed by a CR code.

PAGE FORMAT MODE

✒ Notes

The settings in this mode menu vary as follows:

All settings are effective in the HP PCL5C, EPSON FX-850, and IBM

Proprinter XL modes.

The X and Y (vertical and horizontal) offsets are effective in the BR-

Script 2 mode. Other settings are not effective and they do not appear

in this mode.

The paper size and the X and Y (vertical and horizontal) offsets are

effective in the HP-GL mode. Other settings are not effective and they

do not appear in this mode.

USER’S GUIDE

4–24

The following settings can be made in this mode:

Display Message Page Format Mode

PAPER =LETTER Set cut sheet paper size to letter, A4, legal,

B5, A5 or executive, or envelope size to JIS

B5, COM10, C5, or DL.

LEFT M = 0C P Set the left margin at column 0-126 at

10cpi.

RIGHT M = 80C P Set the right margin at column 10-136 at

10cpi. See “List of Factory Settings” in this

chapter.

TOP M =0.5" P Set the top margin at a distance from the

top edge of the paper: 0, 0.33 (Non-HP),

0.5 (HP), 1.0, 1.5, or 2.0 inches.

BOTTOM M=0.5" P Set the bottom margin at a distance from

the bottom edge of the paper: 0, 0.33 (Non-

HP), 0.5 (HP), 1.0, 1.5, or 2.0 inches.

LINES = 60L P Set the number of lines per page from 5 to

128 lines. See “List of Factory Settings” in

this chapter.

The letter “P” in the display messages indicates that the page orientation

is portrait. The letter “L” is displayed when it is landscape.

Display Message Page Format Mode (Continued)

X OFFSET= 0 Move the print start position (at the upper

left corner on pages) horizontally up to

-500 dots to the left or +500 dots to the

right in 300dpi dot unit increments:

factory setting = 0.

Y OFFSET= 0 Move the print start position (at the upper

left corner on pages) vertically up to -500

dots downward or +500 dots upward in

300dpi dot increments: factory setting =

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–25

✒ Notes

When you make settings in PAGE FORMAT MODE, note the following:

The letter size has been factory set for 120V models. The A4 size has

been factory set for 220/240V models.

When you use a smaller size of paper than that specified in the PAGE

FORMAT MODE, be sure that the print area is smaller than the paper

size, or the inside of the printer will get stained with toner. It is

recommended that you perform a test before actual use: for this test,

you could use letter or A4 size of paper to see the printed area is

completely inside the paper size you are going to use. This simple test

will help prevent toner from being incorrectly applied to the inside of

your printer, which may cause later print jobs to be smudged with

toner.

The factory settings for the right/left margins and lines vary according

to the paper size and orientation. See the tables below.

The top and bottom margins have been factory set to 0.5” in the HP

emulation mode and to 0.33” in the non-HP emulation modes.

The setting margins are subject to the current page orientation. The

display shows the current orientation with “P” for portrait and “L” for

landscape.

Images offset outside the print area are not printed.

■ About Right and Left Margins

The settings range of the right and left margins are subject to the page

orientation as follows. The right margin should be placed 10 columns

greater than the left margin: minimum text width = 10 columns.

If the orientation is changed, the margin settings are restored to the

factory settings. If the paper size is changed and the right and left margins

exceed the paper size, they are restored to the factory settings: if they do

not exceed the paper size, they remain effective.

The following table shows the settings range in columns. The factory

settings are printed in bold.

Paper Size Portrait Landscape

Left Margin Right Margin Left Margin Right Margin

Letter 0-70 10-80 0-96 10-106

A4 0-70 10-78-80 0-103 10-113

Legal 0-70 10-80 0-126 10-136

USER’S GUIDE

4–26

■ About Line Settings

Setting the number of lines/page automatically sets the line spacing or

line feed pitch. If the paper size is changed, the number of lines/page

changes accordingly. The new setting is calculated with the following

expression and the remainder, if any, is ignored. However, the line feed

pitch and the top and bottom margins remain effective.

# of Lines/Page = Page Length – (Top Margin + Bottom Margin)

Line Feed Pitch [Vertical Motion Index (VMI)]

The setting of lines/page is subject to the current paper size and

orientation. For example, when letter-sized paper is used, the printer can

print 60 lines per page in portrait orientation. If the orientation is

changed, the line settings are restored to the factory settings in that

orientation.

The following tables show the factory settings in each emulation mode.

In HP Mode In Non-HP Modes

Orientation Orientation

Size Portrait Landscape Size Portrait Landscape

Letter 60 lines 45 lines Letter 62 lines 47 lines

A4 64 lines 43 lines A4 66 lines 45 lines

Legal 78 lines 45 lines Legal 80 lines 47 lines

✒ Note

When you use application software in the non-HP modes, the

recommended settings are as follows:

Left margin = column 0

Right margin = Max. value

Auto MASK ON

COLOR MODE

✒ Note

The settings in this mode menu are effective only in the HP PCL5C and

BR-Script 2 modes.

Display Message Orientation

COLOR PRINT=ON can print in color mode

COLOR PRINT=OFF can print only in monochrome

mode

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–27

GRAPHICS MODE

✒ Note

The settings in this mode menu are effective only in the HP-GL mode.

They do not appear in any other emulation modes.

Since the HP-GL emulation mode is for a plotter, you can select the

plotter pens, the pen size and percentage of gray in this mode menu.

Display Message Graphics Mode

PEN SETTING Set the size and percentage of gray

separately for six plotter pens.

CHARACTER SET Set the standard and alternate character sets.

✒ Note

In most cases, the application software controls the above graphics mode

settings, so you do not need to set them in this menu with the Mode

button. The software or command setting overrides the button setting.

Select the setting menu and enter the sub-setting menu to make the

settings as follows:

■ Pen Setting

After you select the pen, advance to the sub-setting menu for size or gray-

percentage selection with the ▲ or ▼ button and enter the menu with the

Set button.

Message appears on the

lower row of the LCD What you can adjust

SIZE 1=3 dots * The pen size can be set from 1 dot to 10 dots

GRAY 1=100% * The shades of gray can be set to 15, 30, 45, 75, 90 or 100%

✒ Notes

When another pen is selected, the display shows the selected pen with

the number after “SIZE’ or “GRAY.”

Whichever resolution, 300 or 600 dpi, you have selected, the pen size

takes effect in units of 300 dpi.

USER’S GUIDE

4–28

■ Character Set

When you select “CHARACTER SET,” you can select the standard and

alternate character sets used in the HP-GL emulation mode.

Enter the sub-setting menu and select the menu for the standard or

alternate character set with the ▲ or ▼ button and press the Set button.

Character Set Message on the lower row of the LCD panel

standard character set STANDARD SET

alternate character set ALTERNATE SET

Character Sets in HP-GL Emulation Mode

ANSI ASCII (Factory setting)

9825 CHR. SET

FRENCH/GERMAN

SCANDINAVIAN

SPANISH/LATIN

JIS ASCII

ROMAN8 EXT.

ISO IRV

ISO SWEDISH

ISO SWEDISH:N

ISO NORWAY 1

ISO GERMAN

ISO FRENCH

ISO U.K.

ISO ITALIAN

ISO SPANISH

ISO PORTUGUESE

ISO NORWAY 2

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–29

RESOLUTION MODE

The print resolution, Color Advanced Photoscale Technology (CAPT)

and High Resolution Control (HRC) can be set in this mode menu.

Display Message Resolution Mode

RESOLUTION Set the print resolution of the printer.

CAPT SETTING Set the CAPT function. .

HRC SETTING Set the HRC function.

Select the setting menu and enter the sub-setting menu to make the

settings as follows:

■ Resolution

When you select “RESOLUTION,” you can choose a resolution of 300

or 600 dots per inch (dpi) on this printer. You can set the resolution in

this mode according to your requirement.

The printer may not be able to print large files because of the resolution

and the printer’s memory. The higher the resolution (and thus the file

size), the more memory is required.

Display Message Resolution

RESOLUTION=600 Set the resolution to 600 dpi. (Factory

setting)

RESOLUTION=300 Set the resolution to 300 dpi.

Select the print resolution in this mode according to the resolution

required for your print jobs as shown below:

Resolution Setting in Resolution Mode

Print Jobs 300 dpi 600 dpi

300 dpi For optimum print quality For mixing 300 dpi bitmaps

with 600 dpi

600 dpi Not recommended For optimum print quality

USER’S GUIDE

4–30

✒ Note

Even if you set the resolution to 600 dpi in this mode, the printer may

not be able to print large and complex full color files at 600 dpi

because of insufficient memory. However, it automatically decreases

the resolution to 300 dpi to print them. While the printer is printing in

this mode, the display prompts “01 PR300 … .”

If the printer cannot print files even at 300 dpi, a “MEMORY FULL”

error occurs. See “TROUBLESHOOTING” in Chapter 6.

This automatic resolution decrease function works with the page

protection on. See also “PAGE PROTECTION” in this chapter.

When you want to print large and complex full color data without

decreasing the resolution, you should expand the memory capacity of

the printer to 24-Mbytes or more.

■ CAPT Setting

When you select “CAPT SETTING,” you can use the Color Advanced

Photoscale Technology (CAPT). This function offers photographic fine

colour on graphics. CAPT setting is available only in BR-Script 2 mode

and it requires 24 MB of RAM to enjoy CAPTs large and complex full

color printouts. When you set CAPT=ON, the high resolution control

(HRC) setting is unavailable.

Display Message Advanced Photoscale Technology

CAPT =ON Colour advanced photoscale technology is

effective.

CAPT =OFF Cancel the colour advanced photoscale

technology. (factory setting)

✒ Note

In the PCL 5C mode, CAPT setting is always ON. It depends on the

printer setting if the printer uses the function or not.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–31

■ HRC Setting

When you select “HRC SETTING,” you can set the high resolution

control (HRC). This function is a special function that offers improved

print quality of characters and graphics that conventional laser printers

cannot attain with resolutions of 300 or 600 dpi.

Display Message High Resolution Control

HRC =OFF Cancel high resolution control.

HRC =LIGHT Set high resolution control to the light level.

HRC =MEDIUM Set high resolution control to the medium

level. (Factory setting)

HRC =DARK Set high resolution control to the dark level.

The following figures show jagged print with the high resolution control

set to “OFF” on the left and clear and crisp print with the control set to

“MEDIUM” on the right.

HRC = OFF HRC = MEDIUM

Fig. 4-5 High Resolution Control

The high resolution control has been factory set to “MEDIUM.” The

“LIGHT” or “DARK” setting might be better depending on the selected

print density. Choose the best setting for clear and crisp printouts.

To check the printout with the high resolution control, perform the test

print with the Test button. For operation, see “TEST Button.”

Lines in the test pattern are smoother if the high resolution control is set

to LIGHT, MEDIUM, or DARK. Choose an HRC setting and perform the

test print so that stepped lines become unnoticeable.

HRC = OFF HRC = MEDIUM

Fig. 4-6 High Resolution Control in Test Printout

USER’S GUIDE

4–32

PAGE PROTECTION

✒ Note

The setting in this mode menu is effective in the HP PCL5C, EPSON FX-

850, IBM Proprinter XL, and HP-GL modes. It does not appear in the

BR-Script 2 mode.

If print images are too complex to print, the printer may print them out in

parts or only on part of the page. If this occurs, the printer loses print data

and shows a message on the LCD panel.

The page protection function reserves additional memory so that the

printer can create the entire page image in memory before physically

printing it out. This function can be set for letter, A4, or legal size paper.

Select the paper size for page protection.

Display Message Page Protection

PROTECT=AUTO Page protection on only when it is

necessary. (Factory setting)

PROTECT=LETTER Page protection on for letter size paper.

PROTECT=A4 Page protection on for A4 size paper.

PROTECT=LEGAL Page protection on for legal size paper.

PROTECT=OFF Page protection off

To protect pages, you need the memory capacity as shown in the

following table (the following are the minimum requirement):

Protection 600 dpi Color

Off 16 Mbytes

Letter or A4 20 Mbytes

Legal 24 Mbytes

✒ Note

When you use the page protection function, note the following:

If the function setting is changed, all download fonts and macros—

including permanent ones—are cleared. If the memory is too low to

protect pages, page protection does not take effect.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–33

CARD OPERATION

✒ Notes

BE SURE TO TURN OFF THE PRINTER POWER BUTTON

BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING A FLASH MEMORY

CARD OR HDD CARD, OR THE CARD WILL BE DAMAGED.

The settings in this mode menu are effective only when you have

installed a flash memory card or a HDD card in one of the card slots

in the printer and you have selected the HP PCL5C, HP-GL, or BR-

Script 2 mode. They do not appear when the printer has no card or is

in any other emulation mode.

If you turn the printer off or remove the flash memory card or HDD

card while data is being written onto or deleted from the card, all the

data on the card may be lost.

If the write protect button of the flash memory card or HDD card is

on, this mode menu does not appear.

An HDD card will only fit into slot 2.

Be sure to install a commercial flash memory card or HDD card in the

correct card slot of the printer.

When you are in this mode menu, you can save macros and fonts in the

installed flash memory card or the HDD card.

The sub-setting menus displayed in this mode menu vary according to the

state of the installed card.

Display Message Card Operation

CARD 1 Select Card 1.

CARD 2 Select Card 2.

When two cards are installed, you can select the card that you want to

operate.

When the installed card is not formatted:

When you enter this mode menu with a flash memory card or HDD card

installed but not formatted by this printer, you must first format the card.

USER’S GUIDE

4–34

If CARD is selected,

Display Message Card Operation

FORMAT CARD Format a new flash memory card or HDD

card.

exit Exit to CARD OPERATION

When the display shows “FORMAT CARD,” press the Set button to

format the installed card.

After the printer finishes formatting the card, you must exit to the “CARD

OPERATION” menu.

✒ Notes

When the card is formatted, data that has been previously written is

erased.

It takes ten or more seconds to format a 2-Mbyte flash memory card

or HDD card. The larger the capacity of the card, the longer time it

takes to format the card.

When the installed flash memory card or HDD card is formatted:

When you enter this mode menu with a formatted flash memory card or

HDD card installed, the display shows the following menus:

Display Message Card Operation

CARD 1 Select Card 1.

CARD 2 Select Card 2.

After you have selected the card, the display shows the following

messages:

Display Message Flash Operation

EXECUTE DATA Select the data ID and execute the selected

data. This menu appears only when data has

been saved on the card.

CARD LIST Print out the contents of the flash memory

card or the HDD card. This menu appears

only when anything has been saved in the

card.

SAVE Save received data, macros, and fonts.

DELETE Delete items from the card.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–35

✒ Note

A common use of the flash memory is with FORMS software packages.

With these commercially available software packages you have an option

to send a form to the printer without any data. After you have sent the

form to the printer, you may save the form in the flash memory as a

Macro. Then the next time you want to print this form, you would setup

your FORMS software package to SEND DATA ONLY - USE FORM IN

PRINTER. This process would save you anything from 1 to 4 minutes per

print job.

Select the setting menu and enter the sub-setting menu to change the

settings as follows:

■ Execute Data

✒ Note

This menu appears only when data has been saved on the card.

When you select “EXECUTE DATA,” you can execute any of the data

saved in the SAVE DATA mode.

When you enter this sub-setting menu with the Set button, the printer

prompts you to select the ID of the data.

Select the ID with the ▲ or ▼ button and press the Set button again, so

that the printer executes the selected data.

■ Card List

When you select “CARD LIST” and you press the Set button, the printer

automatically loads paper and starts printing the contents of the installed

flash memory card or HDD card. You can check the contents and the

unused capacity of the card.

USER’S GUIDE

4–36

■ Save

When you select “SAVE” and you press the Set button, you can enter

the following sub-setting menus to save the macros and fonts in the

installed card:

Display Message Save Menu

SAVE DATA Save data that the printer will receive and

set its ID.

SAVE MACRO Save a macro. This menu appears only in

the HP PCL5C emulation mode.

PRIMARY FONT Save the primary font selected with the

Font button. This menu appears only in the

HP PCL5C emulation mode.

SECONDARY FONT Save the secondary font selected with the

Font button. This menu appears only in the

HP PCL5C emulation mode.

DOWNLOAD FONT Save a download font. This menu appears

only in the HP PCL5C emulation mode.

✒ Note

If the capacity of the card becomes low while macros and fonts are being

saved, the display shows the “CARD FULL” error message and they

cannot be saved. Use a new card or delete unnecessary macros and fonts

from the card. The CARD LIST displays the contents and the used

capacity.

• Save Data

You can send data and save it on the card. In this mode, any kind of data

such as PCL data, BR-Script 2 data, and command strings can be saved.

When you select “SAVE DATA” and you press the Set button, the

display shows the guide menu.

The guide menu message prompts you to press the Set button again so

that the printer exits from the data reception status when you have

finished sending data.

Send the data from your computer and then press the Set button.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–37

✒ Notes

When you send data to be saved on the card, it is temporarily stored in the

RAM of the printer. Note the following:

If the received data exceeds the RAM capacity, a memory full error

occurs. You can clear this error with the Continue button. When this

error occurs, only part of the image has been stored in RAM,

therefore, you cannot save the data to the card.

The printer is reset to ensure as much capacity as possible in RAM. If

any data remains, it is printed out first.

After you have finished sending data, press the Set button again, so that

the printer exits from the data reception status.

When you exit from the data reception status, select the data ID with the

▲ or ▼ button and press the Set button. The printer will then save the

received data with the selected ID onto the card.

✒ Notes

When you see an asterisk on the display, the ID number has been used

for other data or a macro. If you select the used ID number, the old

data or macro is erased and replaced with the new data.

Once the data is saved, you can execute it with “EXECUTE DATA”

or with a data execution command.

The data saved in the SAVE DATA mode cannot be run with a macro

execution command in HP PCL5C emulation.

• Save Macro

✒ Note

The “SAVE MACRO” menu appears only in the HP PCL5C emulation

mode.

If you have downloaded a macro into the printer’s memory, you can save

the macro on the installed flash memory card or HDD card.

If a macro has been downloaded into the printer’s memory and you press

the Set button at “SAVE MACRO,” the printer prompts you to select the

ID for the macro.

Select the ID with the ▲ or ▼ button and press the Set button again, so

that the printer saves the macro with the selected ID.

USER’S GUIDE

4–38

✒ Note

When you see an asterisk on the display, the ID number has been used for

another macro or data. If you select the used ID number, the old macro or

data is erased and replaced with the new macro.

You can execute a macro with the macro execution command.

• Primary Font or Secondary Font

✒ Note

The “PRIMARY FONT” and “SECONDARY FONT” menus appear only

in the HP PCL5C emulation mode.

If you have selected the primary or secondary font with the Font button,

you can save the font on the installed flash memory card or HDD card.

When you press the Set button at the “PRIMARY FONT” or

“SECONDARY FONT” message, the printer prompts you to select the

ID of the font.

Select the ID with the ▲ or ▼ button and press the Set button again, so

that the printer saves the font with the selected ID.

✒ Note

When you see an asterisk on the display, the ID number has been used for

another font. If you select the used ID number, the old font is erased and

replaced with the new one.

Whatever font you have selected with the Font button, the printer saves

the font as a bitmapped font as long as the print size is no more than 24

point so that the printer can print it faster than when they are not saved. It

is recommended that you save the scalable font you frequently use for

faster printing.

Since the flash memory card is in card slot 1 or 2 (the HDD card can only

be used in card slot 2), fonts stored in the card behave in the same way as

they would if they were in a dedicated Font Card. You can select the

saved fonts as “CARD1 FONT” or “CARD2 FONT” with the Font

button or the font selection command from your software. For font

selection, see “FONT Button” in Chapter 4.

You can check the saved fonts by printing the list of fonts with the Test

button. See “TEST Button” in Chapter 4.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–39

✒ Notes

When you save the primary or secondary font, note the following:

The font is temporarily stored in the RAM of the printer before it is

saved on the card. If the font data exceeds the RAM capacity, a

memory full error occurs. You can clear this error with the Continue

button. As not all the font data has been stored in RAM, you cannot

save the font to the card. When the font data is saved, the printer is

reset to ensure as much capacity as possible in RAM. If any data

remains, it is printed out.

If you have saved the font at 600-dpi resolution and change the printer

resolution to 300 dpi, the printer cannot print the saved font.

• Download Font

✒ Notes

The “DOWNLOAD FONT” menu appears only in the HP PCL5C

emulation mode.

Be sure to print out the list of download fonts with the Test button

and check the download font ID on the list before you enter this

menu. You need to select the font in this menu using the same number

you see on the list.

If you have downloaded a font into the printer memory, you can save it

on the flash memory card or HDD card.

The printer prompts you to select the download font ID that you can find

from the font list. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move the cursor to the ID

and select it with the Set button.

✒ Note

The download font IDs do not appear when fonts have not been

downloaded.

After you have selected the download font ID, press the Set button, so

that the printer saves the selected download font. Vector or bitmapped

fonts are saved in the format of the original font.

Once you save the download font in the card, you do not need to

download the font every time you need it.

Since the flash memory card is in card slot 1 or 2 (the HDD card can only

be used in card slot 2) of the printer, you can select the saved fonts as

“CARD1(or 2) FONT” with the Font button or the font selection

command from your software. For font selection, see “FONT Button” in

Chapter 4.

USER’S GUIDE

4–40

You can check the fonts saved on the card by printing the list of fonts

with the Test button. See “TEST Button” in Chapter 4.

✒ Note

When the fonts on the HDD card are selected in a print job, they are

copied into the printer RAM. It may cause a printer memory full error

because those fonts occupy some RAM space. It is recommended to

install optional SIMM memory to use the downloaded fonts on the HDD

card.

■ Delete

When you select “DELETE” and press the Set button, you can enter the

following sub-setting menus to delete macros and fonts or format the

installed flash memory card or HDD card:

Display Message Delete Menu

MACRO ID=##### Delete the selected ID macro.

DATA ID=##### Delete the selected ID data.

FONT ID=##### Delete the selected ID font.

FORMAT CARD Format the flash memory card or HDD

card.

• Macro

When you press the Set button at “MACRO ID=#####,” the cursor

moves to the ID number. The printer prompts you to select the ID number

of the macro to be deleted.

Select the ID number with the ▲ or ▼ button and press the Set button, so

that the printer deletes the selected macro.

• Data

When you press the Set button at “DATA ID=#####,” the cursor moves

to the ID number. The printer prompts you to select the ID number of the

data to be deleted.

Select the ID number with the ▲ or ▼ button and press the Set button, so

that the printer deletes the selected data.

• Font

When you press the Set button at “FONT ID=#####,” the cursor moves

to the ID number. The printer prompts you to select the ID number of the

font to be deleted.

Select the ID number with the ▲ or ▼ button and press the Set button, so

that the printer deletes the selected font.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–41

• Format Card

You can format the flash memory card or HDD card to delete its contents.

Instructions are in the following menu:

FORMAT CARD

When you press the Set button in this menu, the printer asks if you want

to delete all contents of the card. Then press the Set button to start

formatting the card.

When you want to cancel formatting, move to the following menu with

the ▲ or ▼ button and press the Set button.

ADVANCED MODE

NETWORK MODE

Display Message Network Mode

LOCK PANEL=OFF Turns on or off lock panel function.

AUTO FF=ON Turns on or off auto form feed.

FF SUPPRESS=OFF Turns on or off the form feed suppress

function.

■ Lock panel

If someone other than you has changed the panel button settings and you

do not know about it, the printer may not print as you expected or it may

not print at all.

To cope with this problem, you can lock or unlock the panel buttons with

your pass number as follows:

Display Message Lock Panel

LOCK=OFF Unlock the panel buttons of the printer.

(Factory setting)

LOCK=ON Lock the panel buttons of the printer.

Even if you lock the panel buttons, you can still use the Sel, Form

Feed, Copy, Continue, Reset and Test buttons for their normal

functions. You can only check the settings of the other buttons, you

cannot change them. To change them, you need to first unlock the panel

buttons.

USER’S GUIDE

4–42

To lock or unlock the panel buttons as above, you need to enter a 3-digit

pass number.

Change the first digit of the number with the ▲ or ▼ button and move to

the next digit with the Set button. After you finish entering your 3-digit

pass number, the panel buttons are locked or unlocked.

✒ Note

Do not forget your pass number that you have used to lock the panel

buttons. If you enter a wrong number, you cannot unlock them. The

display shows the following message:

INCORRECT!!

■ Auto Form Feed

If unprinted data remains in the printer’s memory, the Data LED stays

on. You need to print out the remaining data with the Form Feed button.

See “FORM FEED Button” in Chapter 4.

The auto form feed mode you can set in this menu allows you to print out

the remaining data without pressing the Form Feed button.

You can turn on or off the auto form feed in this mode menu as follows:

Display Message Auto Form Feed

AUTO FF=OFF Turn off the auto form feed. You need to

press the Form Feed button every time

data remains in the printer’s memory.

(Factory setting)

AUTO FF=ON Turn on the auto form feed. Every time data

remains in the printer’s memory, an auto

form feed takes place after the wait time set

as below.

When you turn on the auto form feed as above, you need to set the wait

time in the following sub-setting menu:

Display Message Wait Time

WAIT TIME= 1s Set the wait time for the auto form feed.

.The printer automatically prints out the

.remaining data after the set wait time.

WAIT TIME=99s The wait time can be set from 1 to 99

seconds.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–43

■ Form Feed Suppress

You can turn on or off the form feed suppress function in this mode menu

as follows:

Display Message Form Feed Suppress

FF SUPPRESS=OFF Turn off the form feed suppress function.

(Factory setting)

FF SUPPRESS=ON Turn on the form feed suppress function.

If pages contain no print data, the printer would normally print blank

pages. When you turn this function on, you can suppress printing blank

pages.

When the printer is used in a network environment, it may deliberately

print a blank page at the end of each print job. When you turn on this

function, the printer does not print blank pages.

ERROR PRINT

✒ Note

The setting in this mode menu is effective only in the BR-Script 2 mode.

It does not appear in any other emulation modes.

You can turn on or off the error print in this mode.

Display Message Error Mode

ERROR PRINT=ON Turn on the error print so that the printer

prints an error if it occurs.

ERROR PRINT=OFF Turn off the error print so that the printer

does not print an error if it occurs. (Factory

setting)

USER’S GUIDE

4–44

CONTINUE MODE

If any recoverable error occurs including “Toner Empty,” it can be

cleared with the Continue button. The Continue button function is

selected with this mode setting.

Display Message Continue Mode

CONTINUE=MANUAL Select the manual or auto error recovery

mode. Press the Continue button to clear

errors. (Factory setting)

CONTINUE=AUTO Select the auto error recovery mode. The

printer automatically clears recoverable

errors. You need not press the Continue

button.

SCALABLE FONT

✒ Note

The setting in this mode menu is effective only in the HP PCL5C mode. It

does not appear in any other emulation modes.

Since this printer has many scalable fonts, some application programs

may not be able to handle them correctly. When the HP PCL5C

emulation mode has been selected, the printer may print a different font

rather than the font you have selected with your program (or the font

selection command).

To cope with this font problem, you can restrict the font selection by this

command as follows:

Display Message Scalable Font

FONT=ALL All scalable fonts of this printer can be

selected with the font selection command.

(Factory setting)

FONT=LJ Scalable fonts of this printer other than the

following can be selected with the font

selection command: Atlanta, Bermuda

Script, PC Brussels, Copenhagen,

Germany, Portugal, Calgary, San Diego,

and US Roman.

Even if you restrict the font selection as above, you can select among all

the scalable fonts with the Font button. The setting in this mode menu

merely restricts the font selection command from an application.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–45

INPUT BUFFER

You can increase or decrease the capacity of the input buffer with the ▲

or ▼ button in this mode menu. A larger capacity allows the printer to

receive data from the computer faster.

✒ Note

If the printer reports a memory full error, reduce the capacity of the input

buffer.

Display Message Input Buffer

❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏ The more squares, the larger the capacity

❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏ of the input buffer. The squares indicate

: the level of the capacity but not the size in

:Mbytes.

❏❏ The capacity can be set to 15 levels.

❏(Factory setting =❏❏❏❏❏)

After you change the input buffer capacity (make sure you press the Set

button), be sure to turn off the printer and then turn it on again. The

setting takes effect the next time you turn on the printer.

✒ Notes

The set capacity is not changed even if the emulation mode is

changed.

The actual capacity of the input buffer varies according to the

installed RAM. If the RAM capacity is small, the input buffer capacity

may not be increased.

16M 32M 112M

1 square 30KB 30KB 30KB

5 squaes 0.9MB 4.3MB 21.4MB

15 squares 3.0MB 15.0MB 75.0MB

The Input buffer size increases proportionally .

Fig. 4-7 Input buffer size

USER’S GUIDE

4–46

SAVE SETTINGS

Suppose you share this printer with others who want different panel

button settings or you use the printer with different settings.

Since you can save the current settings in the printer’s memory, you can

easily reset the printer to your necessary settings after they are changed.

For resetting the printer, see “RESET Button” in Chapter 4.

Use the panel buttons to set the configuration of the printer to your needs

and then enter this mode menu to save your settings. Two sets of user

settings can be saved in the printer as follows:

Display Message User Setting

SAVE SETTING 1 Save the current settings as No. 1 in the

printer’s memory.

SAVE SETTING 2 Save the current settings as No. 2 in the

printer’s memory.

If you want to check the user settings, you can print out a list of the

settings with the Test button. See “TEST Button” in Chapter 4.

✒ Note

No user settings have been factory set.

PAGE COUNTER

You can check the total number of printed pages with this mode. When

you enter this mode, the display shows the number for a short time and

automatically moves to “exit MODE” menu.

EXIT MODE

When you finish setting your desired item in the mode menus, advance to

the following message:

MODE

exit MODE

Press the Set button to exit from the mode menus to the off-line ready

state.

✒ Note

Remember that you can exit from the mode menu any time with the Sel

button. After you make a setting effective with the Set button, press the

Sel button. You will exit from the mode menu to the on-line ready state.

The settings you have changed with the Set button are effective after a

quick exit.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–47

FONT Button

Pressing the Font button allows you to select fonts and symbol/character

sets.

✒ Notes

When you use the Font button, note the following:

The Font button is effective in the HP PCL5C, EPSON FX-850, and

IBM Proprinter XL modes. However the settings are subject to the

current emulation mode. Note that the Font button does not work in

the BR-Script 2 mode.

If the application software supports font and symbol/character set

selection, you do not need to set them with the Font button. The

software or command setting overrides the button setting.

If you want to use optional fonts other than the printer’s resident

fonts, be sure to install a font cartridge/card that has your desired

fonts. The printer automatically selects the font that has exactly the

same or similar characteristics as those you set through the software or

with a command. If the installed font cartridge/card happens to have a

font of similar characteristics, the printer will print with an

unexpected font.

You can store the fonts you require on a flash memory card or HDD

card only in the HP PCL5C mode or BR-Script 2 mode when one is

installed. See “CARD OPERATION.”

Setting the Font and Symbol Set in the HP PCL5C Mode

When the HP PCL5C emulation mode has been selected, the font and

symbol set can be set separately as the primary or secondary font.

When the primary font is selected;

Message on the lower row to do;

SELECT FONT P Set the primary font

SYMBOL SET P Set the symbol set

TABLE PRINT P Print the code table

When the secondary font is selected;

Message on the lower row to do;

SELECT FONT S Set the secondary font

SYMBOL SET S Set the symbol set

TABLE PRINT S Print the code table

USER’S GUIDE

4–48

To select the font and symbol set in the HP PCL5C mode, follow these

steps:

1. Press the Sel button to set the printer off-line.

2. Press the Font button and then press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the

primary or secondary font setting menu.

3. Press the Set button.

The display shows the font setting menu. You can skip the font setting

menu and advance to the symbol set setting menu with the ▲ or ▼

button.

✒ Note

The last lowercase letter “p” or “s” indicates the primary or secondary

font setting mode. If you select the secondary font setting mode, the

display shows “s” in the following messages.

4. Press the Set button.

When you enter the “SELECT FONT” menu, you can select the

internal font, optional slot font, or permanent download font.

Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired font source appears on the

display.

Display Message Font Source

INTERNAL FONT Internal font of the printer

CARD1 FONT Optional card font in slot 1

CARD2 FONT Optional card font in slot 2

PERMANENT FONT Permanent download font defined

in the HP emulation mode

Since these steps instruct you how to select the standard font, select

the “INTERNAL FONT” message.

✒ Notes

When you select the optional fonts or permanent download fonts, note the

following:

If the optional font cartridge/card is not installed, the optional font

cannot be selected. No selection appears on the display.

If permanent fonts are not downloaded in the HP emulation mode or

another emulation mode is selected, they cannot be selected. No

selection appears on the display.

The list you can print out with the Test button helps you to select the

optional fonts or permanent download fonts. See “TEST button” in

this chapter or “Selecting the Optional Fonts” in Chapter 5.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–49

5. Press the Set button.

When you enter the font setting mode, the display first shows the

current font with an asterisk.

6. Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired font appears on the display.

See “List of Fonts”.

7. Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective.

■If you select a resident bitmapped font (Letter Gothic 16.66) or

optional bitmapped fonts, the display shows the symbol set setting

menu.

Go to step 8.

■If you select resident scalable fonts or optional scalable fonts, the

display shows the font style setting menu and then changes to the font

size menu.

Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired style appears on the display.

Display Message Font Style

........ Lt Light

........ Reg Regular, Roman, Book, or

Antique

........ Bd Bold or Demi

........ Xb Extrabold

........ It Italic or Oblique

✒ Note

The style indication appears after the font name and the style name differs

according to the font name. The italic or oblique indication can appear

after other style indication: “BdIt” indicates a bold italic font, “LtIt”

indicates a light italic font, etc.

USER’S GUIDE

4–50

Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective, then

the display shows the font size setting menu.

✒ Note

When you have selected fixed-pitch fonts, you set the font size by the

character pitch (width). When you have selected proportional spacing

fonts, you set the font size in points (height). The display shows “PITCH”

or “POINT” accordingly. The following displays show “PITCH” to

simplify instructions.

Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired font size appears on the

display.

Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective.

The blinking cursor then moves to the decimal part of the number.

Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired decimal number appears on

the display.

Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective.

The display then shows the symbol set setting menu.

8. Press the Set button.

When you enter the symbol set setting mode, the display first shows

the current symbol set with an asterisk.

9. Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired symbol set appears on the

display.

See “List of Symbol/Character Sets”.

10. Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective.

The display then shows the next menu.

11. Press the Set button to start printing the code table of the selected

font, or press the ▲ or ▼ button to skip this menu.

The display shows the exit menu.

12. Press the Set button to exit from the setting mode.

The printer returns to the off-line state.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–51

Setting the Font and Character Set in the EPSON FX-850 or

IBM Proprinter XL Mode

When the EPSON FX-850 or IBM Proprinter XL mode has been selected,

the font and character set can be selected.

Message on the lower row to do;

SELECT FONT Set the font

CHARACTER SET Set the character set

TABLE PRINT Print the code table

To select the font and character set in the EPSON

FX-850 or IBM Proprinter XL mode, follow these steps:

1. Press the Sel button to set the printer off-line.

2. Press the Font button.

The display shows the font setting menu. You can skip the font setting

menu and advance to the character set setting menu with the ▲ or ▼

button.

3. Press the Set button.

When you enter the “SELECT FONT” menu, you can select the

internal font, optional slot font, or permanent download font.

Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired font source appears on the

display.

Display Message Font Source

INTERNAL FONT Internal font of the printer

CARD1 FONT Optional card font in slot 1

CARD2 FONT Optional card font in slot 2

PERMANENT FONT Permanent download font defined

in the HP emulation mode

Since these steps instruct you how to select the standard font, select

the “INTERNAL FONT” message.

USER’S GUIDE

4–52

✒ Notes

When you select the optional fonts or permanent download fonts, note the

following:

If the optional font card is not installed, the optional font cannot be

selected. No selection appears on the display.

If permanent fonts are not downloaded in the HP emulation mode or

another emulation mode is selected, the permanent fonts cannot be

selected. No selection appears on the display.

When you select the optional font or download font, press the Set

button to enter the sub-menu. After you select your desired font with

the ▲ or ▼ button, press the Set button again. The list you can print

out with the Test button helps you to select the optional fonts or

permanent download fonts. See “TEST button” in this chapter or

“Selecting the Optional Fonts” in Chapter 5.

4. Press the Set button.

When you enter the font setting mode, the display first shows the

current font with an asterisk.

5. Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired font appears on the display.

See “List of Fonts”.

6. Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective.

The steps you follow vary according to the font type, scalable or

bitmapped.

■If you select a resident bitmapped font (Letter Gothic 16.66) or

optional bitmapped fonts, the display shows the character set setting

menu.

Go to step 7.

■If you select the resident scalable fonts or optional scalable fonts, the

display shows the font style setting menu and then changes to the font

size menu..

Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired style appears on the display.

Display Message Font Style

........ Lt Light

........ Reg Regular, Roman, Book, or

Antique

........ Bd Bold or Demi

........ Xb Extrabold

........ It Italic or Oblique

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–53

✒ Note

The style indication appears after the font name and the style name differs

according to the font name. The italic or oblique indication can appear

after any style indication: “BdIt” indicates a bold italic font, “LtIt”

indicates a light italic font, etc.

Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective, then

the display shows the font size setting menu.

✒ Note

When you have selected fixed-pitch fonts, you set the font size by the

character pitch (width). When you have selected proportional spacing

fonts, you set the font size in points (height). The display shows “PITCH”

or “POINT” accordingly. The following displays show “PITCH” to

simplify instructions.

PITCH= 10.00 *

Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired font size appears on the

display.

Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective.

Then the blinking cursor moves to the decimal part of the number.

Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired decimal number appears on

the display.

Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective.

The display then shows the character set setting menu.

7. Press the Set button.

When you enter the character set setting mode, the display first shows

the current character set with an asterisk.

✒ Note

The character set varies according to the current emulation mode. The

above display shows the factory setting in the EPSON FX-850 emulation

mode.

8. Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired character set appears on the

display.

See “List of Symbol/Character Sets”.

USER’S GUIDE

4–54

9. Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective.

Then the display shows the next menu.

10. Press the Set button to start printing the code table of the selected

font, or press the ▲ or ▼ button to skip this menu.

Then the display shows the exit menu.

11. Press the Set button to exit from the setting mode.

The printer returns to the off-line state.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–55

List of Fonts

Display Message Font

BROUGHAM Scalable Brougham

LETTERGOTHIC Scalable LetterGothic

OCR-A Bitmapped OCR-A 12 cpi

OCR-B Bitmapped OCR-B 12 cpi

LETTERGOTH16.6 Bitmapped Letter Gothic 16.66 cpi

LTRGOTH16 LTN2 Bitmapped Letter Gothic 16.66 cpi

ISO 8859-1 Latin2

LTRGOTH16 LTN5 Bitmapped Letter Gothic 16.66 cpi

ISO 8859-1 Latin5

LTRGOTH16 LTN6 Bitmapped Letter Gothic 16.66 cpi

ISO 8859-1 Latin6

PcTENNESSEE Scalable PC Tennessee

OKLAHOMA Scalable Oklahoma

CONNECTICUT Scalable Connecticut

CLEVELAND Cd Scalable Cleveland Condensed

PcBRUSSELS Scalable PC Brussels

UTAH Scalable Utah

UTAH CONDENSED Scalable Utah Condensed

AntiqueOAKLAND Scalable Antique Oakland

GUATEMALA Scalable Guatemala Antique

MARYLAND Scalable Maryland

ALASKA Scalable Alaska

HELSINKI Scalable Helsinki

BR SYMBOL Scalable BR Symbol

TENNESSEE Scalable Tennessee

W DINGBATS Scalable W Dingbats

GERMANY Scalable Germany

SAN DIEGO Scalable San Diego

BERMUDA SCRIPT Scalable Bermuda Script

US ROMAN Scalable US Roman

ATLANTA Scalable Atlanta

COPENHAGEN Scalable Copenhagen

PORTUGAL Scalable Portugal

CALGARY Scalable Calgary

USER’S GUIDE

4–56

List of Symbol/Character Sets

The symbol sets and character sets are subject to the current emulation

mode.

HP PCL5C EPSON IBM

ROMAN 8 US ASCII *PC-8 *

ISO LATIN1 GERMAN PC-8 D/N

ISO LATIN2 UK ASCII I PC-850

ISO LATIN5 FRENCH I PC-852

ISO LATIN6 DANISH I PC-860

PC-775 ITALY PC-863

PC-8 *SPANISH PC-865

PC-8 D/N SWEDISH PC-8 TURKISH

PC-850 JAPANESE

PC-852 NORWEGIAN

PC-8 TURKISH DANISH II

PC-1004 UK ASCII II

WINDOWS LATIN1 FRENCH II

WINDOWS LATIN2 DUTCH

WINDOWS LATIN5 SOUTH AFRICAN

WINDOWS BALTIC PC-8

DESKTOP PC-8 D/N

PS TEXT PC-850

VENTURA INTL PC-852

VENTURA US PC-860

MS PUBLISHING PC-863

MATH-8 PC-865

PS MATH PC-8 TURKISH

VENTURA MATH

PI FONT

LEGAL

ISO 2 IRV

ISO 4 UK

ISO 6 ASCII

ISO10 SWE/FIN

ISO11 SWEDISH

ISO14 JISASCII

ISO15 ITALIAN

ISO16 POR

ISO17 SPANISH

ISO21 GERMAN

ISO25 FRENCH

ISO57 CHINESE

ISO60 NOR v1

ISO61 NOR v2

ISO69 FRENCH

ISO84 POR

ISO85 SPANISH

WINDOWS 3.0

HP GERMAN

HP SPANISH

MC TEXT

✒ Note

The factory settings are indicated by an asterisk “ * ” in the table above.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–57

FORM FEED Button (REPRINT Button)

The Form Feed button works in two ways according to the Data LED

status.

Form Feed

When the printer is off-line and there is data remaining in the printer

memory, the Data LED comes on. Pressing the Form Feed button

executes a form feed and prints out the remaining data.

If you set the number of copies with the Copy button and press the Sel

button during copy printing, the printer suspends the form feed operation.

Pressing the Sel button again resumes the form feed operation.

When no data remains in the printer memory and you press the Form

Feed button, the printer ignores this button operation.

✒ Note

If you want the printer to print out the remaining data automatically, you

can set the auto form feed function with the Mode button. See “AUTO

FORMFEED” in Chapter 4.

Reprint Function

You can reprint the last print job without sending it from the computer

again. When you press the Form Feed button with the Data LED off,

the printer reprints the pages of the last print job. You can use this

function in order to recover printing when a paper jam has occurred.

After printing is finished, set the printer off-line and press the Form

Feed button once, so that the printer prints the pages of the last print job.

However, if there is not enough memory to keep all the pages of the last

print job, the printer will print only the last page of the last job.

When you press the Form Feed button one or more times during

reprinting, you can set the number of copies to reprint. The printer

reprints the last job the number of times you press the button.

✒ Note

The reprint data remains in the printer’s memory until the printer is reset

or the emulation, or some settings, are changed. After you have reprinted

confidential data, be sure to reset the printer to clear it from the printer

memory.

USER’S GUIDE

4–58

CONTINUE Button

If there is a problem with the printer, it automatically suspends printing

and goes off-line. Pressing the Continue button may ignore the error and

resume printer operation.

The function of this button varies according to the CONTINUE mode set

with the Mode button.

Since the CONTINUE mode has been factory set to MANUAL, you need

to press the Continue button to recover from a printer error message. If

you set the mode to AUTO, the printer attempts to resume the operation

without pressing the Continue button.

For further information, see “CONTINUE MODE” in Chapter 4.

✒ Note

The Continue button is not a cure-all. The printer cannot recover from

some errors. Take corrective action, referring to the error message. See

“TROUBLESHOOTING” in Chapter 6.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–59

BUTTONS IN SHIFT MODE

You can control the basic printer operations and make various printer

settings also in SHIFT mode. Functions available in SHIFT mode are

labeled with the indications just below the panel buttons.

Copy Pages Orientation Feeder

Emulation Mode K YMCToner

Ready

Alarm

Emulation Economy

Test

Shift Copy

Reset

On Line Data

Feeder

Fig. 4-8 Buttons in SHIFT Mode

✒ Note

The factory settings are printed in bold in this section.

SHIFT Button

When you hold the Shift button down with the printer off-line, you can

change settings with the panel buttons in SHIFT mode. Since the shift

state is not locked, you need to hold it down and press the button to get

access to the corresponding shifted function labeled under the button.

USER’S GUIDE

4–60

EMULATION Button

This printer has been factory set with the automatic emulation selection

function on. The printer can select the emulation mode automatically

when it receives data from the computer.

When you want to set the emulation mode manually, hold down the Shift

button and press the Emulation button. Then you enter the setting mode

where you can change the emulation.

To set the emulation mode, follow these steps:

1. Press the Sel button to set the printer off-line.

2. Hold down the Shift button and press the Emulation button.

When you enter the setting mode, the display first shows the current

emulation mode with an asterisk.

3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired emulation mode appears on

the display.

Display Message Emulation Mode

AUTO Auto Emulation Selection

HP PCL5C HP PCL5C

BR-Script 2 BR-Script level 2 mode

HP-GL HP-GL Plotter Mode

EPSON FX-850 EPSON FX-850

IBMProprinterXL IBM Proprinter XL

4. Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective.

When you select any specific emulation mode other than “AUTO,” an

asterisk appears at the end of the display for a short time. Then the

printer automatically exits from the setting mode to the off-line state.

When you select “AUTO,” the sub-item “Time Out” for the automatic

emulation selection appears on the display. Go to the next step.

5. Set “Time Out” with the ▲ or ▼ button.

This time out is the duration during which the printer will not allow an

automatic emulation change. You can set it from 1 second to 99

seconds: the factory setting is 5 seconds.

6. Press the Set button.

The next sub-item “EPSON/IBM” appears on the display.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–61

7. Select EPSON or IBM with the ▲ or ▼ button.

Since the printer cannot distinguish between the EPSON and IBM

emulation modes, you need to select the EPSON or IBM emulation

even in AUTO mode.

When the printer receives data from the computer, it automatically

selects the emulation mode in any of the following combinations:

EPSON/IBM Priority EPSON IBM

Auto Selection Mode HP PCL5C HP PCL5C

BR-Script 2 BR-Script 2

HP-GL HP-GL

EPSON FX-850 IBM Proprinter XL

8. Press the Set button.

The next sub-item “KEEP PCL” appears on the display.

This function is for permanent macros and fonts downloaded in the

HP PCL5C mode.

9. Turn on or off the “KEEP PCL” function with the ▲ or ▼ button.

When you do not need to keep the permanent macros and fonts used

in HP PCL5C mode, turn this function off. When you want to keep

them, you can turn it on.

If the function is turned on, the downloaded macros and fonts are kept

in the printer’s memory until the printer is turned off, so that they are

not cleared by changing the emulation to BR-Script 2 mode.

✒ Note

The “KEEP PCL” function reserves free space in the printer’s memory

and may cause a memory full error. If a memory full error occurs, expand

the memory capacity or turn off this function.

10. Press the Set button.

The “exit” message appears on the display.

11. Press the Set button again.

The printer exits from the setting mode to the off-line state.

✒ Note

When you use the automatic emulation selection, try it with your

application software or network server. If the function does not work

properly, select a particular emulation mode manually. You can use the

following commands to select the emulation on a network.

Commands Hex Emulation

ESC CR H 1B 0D 48 HP PCL5C

ESC CR AB 1B 0D 41 42 BR-Script 2

ESC CR GL 1B 0D 47 4C HP-GL

ESC CR E 1B 0D 45 EPSON FX-850

ESC CR I 1B 0D 49 IBM Proprinter XL

USER’S GUIDE

4–62

About Emulation Modes

This printer has the following emulation modes:

■HP PCL5C Mode

The HP PCL5C mode (or HP mode) is the emulation mode where this

printer emulates Hewlett-Packard PCL5C color printers and PCL6

monochrome printers. Since a large number of application software

packages support this type of laser printer, your printer will operate at its

optimum performance in this mode.

■BR-Script 2 Mode (color)

BR-Script is a Brother original page description language and it is a

PostScript® language emulation interpreter. This printer has level 2 BR-

Script which supports full color printing at 600 dpi . The BR-Script

interpreter of this printer can control text and graphics on pages

completely and satisfactorily.

Average users do not need to know much about PostScript® language. If

you want to obtain technical information about PostScript® commands,

see the following commercial manuals:

• Adobe Systems Incorporated. PostScript® Language Reference

Manual, 2nd Edition. Menlo Park: Addison-Wesley Publishing

Company, Inc., 1990.

• Adobe Systems Incorporated. PostScript® Language Program

Design.

Menlo Park: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., 1988.

• Adobe Systems Incorporated. PostScript® Language Reference

Manual. Menlo Park: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc.,

1985.

• Adobe Systems Incorporated. PostScript® Language Tutorial and

Cookbook. Menlo Park: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc.,

1985.

■HP-GL Mode (monochrome)

The HP-GL mode is the emulation mode where this printer emulates the

Hewlett-Packard plotter model HP-7475A. Since many graphics and

CAD applications support this type of plotter, you can get more out of

this printer working with your application software.

■ EPSON FX-850 and IBM Proprinter XL Mode (monochrome)

The EPSON FX-850 and IBM Proprinter XL modes are the emulation

modes where this printer emulates the industry-standard dot matrix

printers of respective manufacturers. Since most applications support

these printers, you do not have to be concerned about compatibility.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–63

ECONOMY Button

TONER SAVE MODE

You can turn on or off the toner save mode as follows:

Display Message Toner Save Mode

TONER SAVE=OFF Turn off the toner save mode.

(Factory setting)

TONER SAVE=ON Turn on the toner save mode. The amount

of toner on the paper decreases and the

printed image may look lighter.

POWER SAVE MODE

You can turn on or off the power save mode as follows:

Display Message Power Save Mode

POWER SAVE=ON Turn on the power save mode. The fixing

assembly of the print engine is turned off

after the specified time to save power.

(Factory setting)

POWER SAVE=OFF Turn off the power save mode. The fixing

assembly of the print engine is always

powered on to keep its temperature at the

specified level.

When you turn on the power save mode with the Set button, the display

shows the next sub-setting menu.

You need to set the time out for the power save mode from 1 to 99

minutes with the ▲ or ▼ button: factory setting =60 minutes. The time

out is the duration after which the fixing assembly of the print engine is

turned off (“SLEEP”) to save power.

When the power save mode is turned on, the printer turns on the fixing

assembly again automatically after it receives data from the computer.

Since the fixing assembly must reach the specified high temperature, it

takes a slightly longer time to start printing the first page.

USER’S GUIDE

4–64

FEEDER Button

You can select the feeder and manual feed mode with the Feeder button.

Display Message Feeder

FEEDER=AUTO Select a feeder or auto paper feed.

MANUAL MODE=ON Enable/disable the manual feed

mode.

MEDIA TYPE Select print media

SMALL SIZE Set the small paper size detection

of sizes under B5(JIS)

You can check the current feeder.

When you want to change settings with the Feeder button, hold down

the Shift button and press the Feeder button. You will then enter the

setting mode where you change the feeder, manual feed mode, etc.

FEEDER

To select the feeder, follow these steps:

1. Press the Sel button to set the printer off-line.

2. Hold down the Shift button and press the Feeder button.

When you enter the setting mode, the display first shows the current

feeder setting with the asterisk.

3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired feeder appears on the

display.

Display Message Paper Feed Method/Paper Source

FEEDER=AUTO Auto paper feed

FEEDER=TRAY1 Upper Media Cassette (Tray 1)

FEEDER=TRAY2 Optional Lower Media Cassette

(Tray 2)

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–65

✒ Notes

When you select a feeder, note the following:

The “FEEDER=TRAY2” message appears only when the optional

lower tray unit has been installed.

The FEEDER=AUTO setting allows you to optimize your printing

environment. This setting allows a print job to continue uninterrupted

when a paper out condition occurs. The default setting is AUTO. This

setting allows a common printing situation: Loading the same size

and type of paper in both paper trays. This allows your print job to

continue without error if one of the paper trays becomes empty. The

printer will automatically select the other tray if one tray becomes

empty.

When you select the FEEDER=AUTO, the printer automatically

searches for the paper size you set with the Mode button in the PAGE

FORMAT mode and loads the paper from the paper source that

contains the selected size of paper. If the upper and lower Media

Cassettes contain different sizes of paper and one Media Cassette runs

out of paper, the printer stops printing without automatically changing

to the other paper source to feed paper. It prevents a different size of

paper from being printed by mistake.

If you have the same size of paper loaded but of different type (i.e.:

FORM “A” in Tray 1, Form “B” in Tray 2) it is recommended to

change the feeder setting from AUTO to Tray 1. This setting will

allow the printer to pause when a paper empty condition occurs,

allowing you to load the correct type of paper, then press Select to

finish the print job.

4. Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective.

When you select “TRAY1,” or “TRAY2,” an asterisk appears at the

end of the display for a short time. Then the “exit” message appears

on the display. Press the Set button again, so that the printer exits

from the setting mode to the off-line state.

When you select “AUTO”, the tray selection menu for the auto paper

feed appears on the display. Go to the next step.

5. Change the tray combination and priority with the ▲ or ▼ button.

When “AUTO=T1>T2” is set, both Tray 1 and the Tray2 are selected

but tray 1 will be selected first if the paper size in tray 1 and the page

size for the printing job match each other. (If you are using the

optional Lower Tray and want to give priority to Tray2, you can use

the “AUTO=T2>T1” setting.)

6. Press the Set button.

USER’S GUIDE

4–66

MANUAL MODE

This printer has no manual feed tray or multi-purpose tray. Therefore you

cannot feed special paper in the usual way. However this printer has a

special manual feed mode with Tray 1 in order to overcome this

inconvenience. When “MANUAL MODE=ON” is selected or a manual

feed command is sent to the printer, the printer will wait for you to

replace the paper in Tray 1 with the paper for manual printing.

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the manual mode on or off.

2. Press the Set button to make the setting effective.

MEDIA TYPE

When you use any paper other than ordinary plain paper, such as thick

bond paper, envelope, or transparency, the appropriate media type must

be selected in the media type mode in order to get the best print quality.

1. Press the Set button to enter the media type mode. The display then

shows the current setting with an asterisk.

2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select regular, thick paper, or transparency

then press the Set button to make the setting effective.

✒ Note

Please do not forget to change the setting back to regular after you

have printed on your special media with the setting changed.

SMALL SIZE

This printer can detect the size of paper in the trays automatically. If there

is no paper loaded as specified by the user application, the printer

indicates to the user to load the correct size paper by displaying “LOAD

PAPER XX SIZE” on the LCD panel. The printer can detect A4, Letter,

executive, Legal (only in Optional Legal Cassette) and B5(ISO), but not

A5, B5(JIS), C5, COM10 and DL size even though they can be handled.

For this reason, it is necessary to change the detection size for paper

smaller than B5.

1. Press the Set button to enter the small size mode. The display then

shows the current setting with an asterisk. Then select “T1” or “T2”.

2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select B5 (JIS), B5 (ISO), A5, C5, COM10

or DL then press the Set button to make the setting effective.

(B5 (JIS) and B5 (ISO) only for “T2”.)

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–67

COPY Button

You can set the number of copies to print of the same page with the

Copy button. The computer will release from a printing job in a shorter

time if you use this feature than when you set the copy print quantity with

your application software. Check the current setting on the display.

When the number of copies has been set to 3, the display may look as

follows:

LJ READY 003P T1

AUTO

✒ Note

If you send too many pages to be stored in the printer memory, part or all

of the set of pages or copies may not be printed.

To set the number of copies, follow these steps:

1. Press the Sel button to set the printer off-line.

2. Hold down the Shift button and press the Copy button.

When you enter the setting mode, the display first shows the current

setting with the asterisk.

3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired number appears on the

display.

Display Message # of Copies to Print Same Pages

COPY PAGES= 1 1 page

COPY PAGES= 2 2 pages

... . . .

COPY PAGES=999 999 pages (max.)

4. Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective.

An asterisk appears at the end of the display for a short time. Then the

printer automatically exits from the setting mode to the off-line state.

USER’S GUIDE

4–68

RESET Button

You can reset the printer with the Reset button. The print data that the

printer has already received from the computer is cleared and the printer

settings are restored to the user settings or factory settings.

Any temporary download fonts and macro settings you set with

commands in HP PCL5C mode are also cleared.

When you want to reset the printer, hold down the Shift button and press

the Reset button. You then enter the reset mode where you reset the

printer.

To reset the printer, follow these steps:

1. Press the Sel button to set the printer off-line.

2. Hold down the Shift button and press the Reset button.

When you enter the reset mode, the display shows the first reset mode

item.

3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired reset mode appears on the

display.

Display Message Reset Mode

RESET PRINTER Resets the printer and restores all

printer settings–including

command settings–to settings you

have previously made with the

panel buttons.

RESET SETTING 1 Resets the printer and restores all

RESET SETTING 2 printer settings–including

command settings–to the selected

number (1-2) of user settings you

have previously made with the

Mode button.

FACTORY SETTINGS Resets the printer and restores all

printer settings–including

command settings–to the factory

settings. See “List of Factory

Settings.”

RESET PARTS LIFE This menu appears only when a

maintenance part is being

recommended for replacement.

Resets the life counter of the

maintenance part that has been

replaced.

exit Exits from the reset mode. The

printer is not reset.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–69

4. Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective.

The printer is reset according to the selected reset mode.

Selected Mode LCD message on the upper row

RESET PRINTER 08 RESET TO USER SETTINGS

RESET SETTING 1-2 08 RESET TO SETTING # 1*

FACTORY SETTINGS 09 RESET TO FACTORY

SETTINGS

1* - # indicates the selected number of saved settings

The printer automatically exits from the reset mode to the on-line

state.

5. When you enter the RESET PARTS LIFE mode;

LCD Message on the lower row Parts replaced

FC ROLLER Fuser Cleaner

OPC BELT (OPC) Belt Cartridge

FUSER UNIT Fixing Unit

120K KIT Drum Cleaner, Paper discharger,

Transfer Roller

The reset item is selected according to the Maintenance message that

shows the currently recommended maintenance part to replace. Press

Set to reset the parts life.

List of Factory Settings

The following table shows the factory settings made before shipment.

✒ Notes

The settings are subject to the emulation mode. Effective modes are

indicated in parentheses in the following table.

The following settings cannot be restored to the factory settings with

the Reset button in the “FACTORY SETTINGS” mode:

INTERFACE MODE, HRC SETTING, PAGE PROTECTION,

SCALABLE FONT, LOCK PANEL, and PAGE COUNTER, and

local language for display messages.

The COPY setting is always restored to the factory setting when the

printer is turned off and on again.

The user settings are overwritten after resetting to setting 1 or 2.

USER’S GUIDE

4–70

Button Item Sub-Item Factory Setting

MODE

INTERFACE MODE – I/F=AUTO

For AUTO mode

TIME OUT TIME OUT= 5s

For bi-directional PARALLEL interface

HIGH SPEED HIGH SPEED=ON

BI-DIR BI-DIR=ON

For RS-232C serial interface

Baud Rate BaudRate= 9600

Code Type CodeType=8 bits

Parity Parity =NONE

Stop Bit Stop Bit= 1 bits

Xon/Xoff Xon/Xoff=ON

DTR (ER) DTR (ER)=ON

Robust Xon Robust Xon=OFF

FORMAT MODE ORIENTATION (Except for BR-

Script 2)

ORI=PORTRAIT

AUTO MODE (HP PCL5C)

AUTO LF OFF

AUTO CR OFF

AUTO WRAP OFF

AUTO SKIP ON

AUTO MODE (EPSON)

AUTO LF OFF

AUTO CR ON (No indication)

AUTO WRAP ON (No indication)

AUTO MASK OFF

AUTO MODE (IBM)

AUTO LF OFF

AUTO CR OFF

AUTO WRAP ON (No indication)

AUTO MASK OFF

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–71

Button Item Sub-Item Factory Setting

MODE (continued)

FORMAT MODE (continued)

PAGE FORMAT MODE (HP PCL5C,

EPSON, & IBM)

PAPER LETTER

(For 110/120V model)

A4 (For 220/240V model)

LEFT M 0 (LETTER, Portrait)

0 (LEGAL, Portrait)

0 (A4, Portrait)

0 (A5, Portrait)

0 (B5, Portrait)

0 (JIS B5, Portrait)

0 (EXE, Portrait)

0 (COM10, Portrait)

0 (DL, Portrait)

0 (LETTER, Landscape)

0 (LEGAL, Landscape)

0 (A4, Landscape)

0 (A5, Landscape)

0 (A6, Landscape)

0 (B5, Landscape)

0 (JIS B5, Landscape)

0 (EXE, Landscape)

0 (COM10, Landscape)

0 (DL, Landscape)

RIGHT M 80 (LETTER, Portrait)

80 (LEGAL, Portrait)

78 (A4, Portrait)

78 (A5, Portrait)

64 (B5, Portrait)

67 (JIS B5, Portrait)

67 (EXE, Portrait)

36 (COM10, Portrait)

38 (DL, Portrait)

106 (LETTER, Landscape)

136 (LEGAL, Landscape)

113 (A4, Landscape)

113 (A5, Landscape)

113 (A6, Landscape)

94 (B5, Landscape)

97 (JIS B5, Landscape)

101 (EXE, Landscape)

91 (COM10, Landscape)

82 (DL, Landscape)

TOP M 0.5” (HP)

0.33” (Non-HP)

BOTTOM M 0.5” (HP)

0.33” (Non-HP)

USER’S GUIDE

4–72

Button Item Sub-Item Factor

Settin

MODE

(continued) PAGE FORMAT

(continued) LINES (HP) 60

(

LETTER

PORTRAIT)

(

LEGAL

PORTRAIT)

64 (A4, PORTRAIT)

64 (A5, PORTRAIT)

53 (B5, Portrait)

54 (JIS B5, Portrait)

57 (EXE, Portrait)

51 (COM10, Portrait)

45 (DL, Portrait)

(

LETTER

LANDSCAPE)

(

LEGAL

LANDSCAPE)

43 (A4, LANDSCAPE)

43 (A5, LANDSCAPE)

35 (B5, Landsca

36 (JIS B5, Landsca

37 (EXE, Landsca

18 (COM10, Landsca

19 (DL, Landsca

LINES (Non-HP) 62

(

LETTER

PORTRAIT)

(

LEGAL

PORTRAIT)

66 (A4, PORTRAIT)

66 (A6, PORTRAIT)

55 (B5, Portrait)

56 (JIS B5, Portrait)

59 (EXE, Portrait)

53 (COM10, Portrait)

47 (DL, Portrait)

(

LETTER

LANDSCAPE)

(

LEGAL

LANDSCAPE)

45 (A4, LANDSCAPE)

45 (A5, LANDSCAPE)

37 (B5, Landsca

38 (JIS B5, Landsca

39 (EXE, Landsca

20 (COM10, Landsca

21 (DL, Landsca

X OFFSET X OFFSET=0

Y OFFSET Y OFFSET=0

COLOR MODE COLOR PRINT COLOR PRINT=ON

FORMAT MODE (BR-Scri

t 2) X OFFSET X OFFSET=0

Y OFFSET Y OFFSET=0

FORMAT MODE (HP-GL) PAGE FORMAT MODE

PAPER LETTER

(For 110/120V model)

(

For 220/240V

model)

X OFFSET X OFFSET=0

Y OFFSET Y OFFSET=0

GRAPHICS MODE (HP-GL)

PEN SETTING SIZE: 3 dots

GRAY: 100%

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–73

Button Item Sub-Item Factory Setting

MODE (continued)

RESOLUTION MODE RESOLUTION RESOLUTION=600

CAPT SETTING CAPT=OFF

HRC SETTING HRC=MEDIUM

PAGE PROTECTION – PROTECT=AUTO

(Non-BR-Script2)

ADVANCED MODE

LOCK PANEL LOCK PANEL=OFF

AUTO FF AUTO FF=OFF

For AUTO FF=ON

WAIT TIME

WAIT TIME= 5s

FF SUPPRESS FF SUPPRESS=OFF

ERROR PRINT (BR-Script2) ERROR PRINT=OFF

CONTINUE MODE CONTINUE=MANUAL

SCALABLE FONT

(HP, EPSON, & IBM) FONT=ALL

For any interfaces

INPUT BUFFER

❏❏❏❏❏

PAGE COUNTER – 0

FONT (HP)

PRIMARY FONT SELECT FONT BROUGHAM

SYMBOL SET PC-8

SECONDARY FONT SELECT FONT BROUGHAM

SYMBOL SET PC-8

FONT (EPSON)

FONT – BROUGHAM

CHARACTER SET – US ASCII

FONT (IBM)

FONT – BROUGHAM

CHARACTER SET – PC-8

EMULATION

– – AUTO

For AUTO mode TIME OUT TIME OUT= 5s

EPSON/IBM EPSON/IBM=EPSON

KEEP PCL KEEP PCL=OFF

USER’S GUIDE

4–74

Button Item Sub-Item Factory Setting

ECONOMY –

TONER SAVE MODE - TONER SAVE=OFF

POWER SAVE MODE - POWER SAVE=ON

For POWER SAVE=ON

TIME OUT TIME OUT=30m

FEEDER

FEEDER - FEEDER=AUTO

For FEEDER=AUTO

AUTO=T1>T2

MANUAL MODE - MANUAL MODE=OFF

MEDIA TYPE - REGULAR

SMALL SIZE - SIZE=ISO B5

COPY – – COPY PAGES=1

LANGUAGE (FORM FEED +

POWER ON)

– LANG=ENGLISH

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–75

TEST Button

You can test the printer or print out the list of fonts with the Test button.

To do so, hold down the Shift button and press the Test button. You will

then enter test mode where you may test the printer or print out the list of

fonts.

To test the printer, follow these steps:

1. Press the Sel button to set the printer off-line.

2. Hold down the Shift button and press the Test button.

When you enter test mode, the display shows the first test mode item.

3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired test mode appears on the

display.

Display Message Test Mode

DEMO PAGE Prints out the demonstration.

TEST PRINT Performs the printer test and prints

out the test pattern.

PRINT CONFIG Prints out the list of panel button

settings you have configured for

the printer as user settings.

PRINT FONTS I Prints out the list of internal or

resident fonts.

PRINT FONTS C Prints out the list of optional fonts

stored in the font cartridge/card.

PRINT FONTS P Prints out the list of permanent

download fonts.

exit Exits from the test mode. The

printer does not perform the test.

USER’S GUIDE

4–76

✒ Notes

The message “PRINT FONTS C” or “PRINT FONTS P” appears only

when the optional font card is installed in the font slot or permanent

download fonts are stored in printer memory.

If the optional font card is installed, you can print out the list of

optional fonts. Since the list shows the ID numbers specific to each

optional font, it helps you to select them with the Font button.

If user-defined characters are already downloaded into the printer

memory as permanent download fonts, you can print out the list of

them. For further information, see “FONT Button” in Chapter 4 and

Technical Reference Manual that is optionally available.

4. Press the Set button to make the displayed selection effective.

The printer prints out the test patterns or lists according to the selected

test mode.

✒ Note

The printed list shows the panel button settings you have made as user

settings with the Mode button. See “SAVE SETTINGS” in Chapter 4.

When the printer finishes printing, it automatically exits from the test

mode to the off-line state.

CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL

4–77

HEX DUMP MODE

This printer has a useful Hex Dump Mode for checking the print data sent

from your computer. The printer lists the print data in hexadecimal form.

To enter the hex dump mode, follow these steps:

1. Check the power state.

2. Operate the buttons according to the power state.

• If the printer has been turned off, turn on the printer.

The printer starts the self-test and the display shows the following

message.

04 SELF TEST

• If the printer has been turned on, reset the printer with the Reset

button.

1) Press the Sel button to set the printer off-line.

2) Hold down the Shift button and press the Reset button.

The display will show “RESET PRINTER”.

3) Press the Set button with the “RESET PRINTER” selected.

3. Hold down the Continue / Shift button.

The printer checks the Continue / Shift button at the end of self-test

or printer reset. If the button is held down, the printer enters the hex

dump mode and goes on-line. The display will show the message

“HEX DUMP MODE” and the printer will return to the on-line state.

✒ Note

If the printer returns to the on-line state without displaying the message

“HEX DUMP MODE”, you did not hold down the Continue / Shift

button immediately after pressing the Set button. Try the above steps

once again.

4. Send data from your computer.

When the printer receives data, it starts printing hexadecimal values of

the received data.

USER’S GUIDE

4–78

To exit from the hex dump mode, follow these basic steps:

1. Press the Sel button to set the printer off-line.

2. Reset the printer with the Reset button.

Or turn off the printer, wait for a few seconds, and turn it on again.

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-1

CHAPTER 5

MAINTENANCE

REPLACING THE CONSUMABLES

You need to replace the following consumables periodically. When the time comes to

replace consumables, the following messages will appear on the LCD panel.

The following are Operator Call Messages and when these messages are displayed on the

LCD, the printer stops printing.

LCD Operator Call

Message Consumable

to Replace Approximate

Life How to

Replace Order

No.

16 TONER EMPTY

K COLOR

Toner Cartridge

Black 10,000 pages

*1 See 5-3 TN-01BK

16 TONER EMPTY

CMY COLOR

Toner Cartridge

Cyan, Magenta

or Yellow

6,000 pages

*1 See 5-3 TN-01C

TN-01M

TN-01Y

22 WASTE TONER Waste Toner

Pack 12,000 images

*1 *4 See 5-11 WT-1CL

23 OIL EMPTY Oil Bottle 12,000 pages See 5-6 FO-1CL

24 CHANGE FCR Fuser Cleaner 12,000 pages See 5-9 FO-1CL

CR-1CL

The following are Maintenance Messages and appear on the lower row of the LCD in

OnLine mode. These messages prompt you to replace each of the consumables before they

run out.

LCD Maintenance

Message Consumable

to Replace Approximate

Life How to

Replace Order

No.

(Toner nearly empty)

   

K C M Y

Toner Cartridge

Black 10,000 pages

*1 *2 See 5-3 TN-01BK

(Toner nearly empty)

   

K C M Y

Toner Cartridge

Cyan, Magenta

or Yellow

6,000 pages

*1 *2 See 5-3 TN-01C

TN-01M

TN-01Y

FUSER OIL LOW

Oil Bottle 12,000 pages See 5-6 FO-1CL

USER’S GUIDE

5-2

LCD Maintenance

Message Consumable to

Replace A

roximate

Life How to

Replace Order

No.

REPLACE FCR Fuser Cleaner 12,000 pages See 5-9 FO-1CL

CR-1CL

REPLACE OPC BELT (OPC) Belt

Cartridge 50,000 images

(continuously

printed) *4

See 5-13 OP-1CL

REPLACE FUSER Fusing unit 40,000 pages See 5-17

REPLACE 120K KIT Drum Cleaner,

Paper Discharger,

Transfer Roller

Paper Feeding

Roller

Separator Pad

Transfer Drum

120,000 pages See 5-20

✒ Note

The Ozone Filter does not have an LCD message indication. However,

you need to replace it once a year.

*1 - at 5 % coverage print (A4-Letter size).

✒ Note

The toner cartridges shipped with the printer contain only half the normal

amount of toner. (5,000 pages (Black) and 3,000 pages (Cyan, Magenta

and Yellow)).

*2 - For example, if the Cyan and Magenta toner cartridges are nearly empty, the

indication will be “” (= blinking )

K C M Y

If the Cyan and Magenta toner cartridges are empty, the  indication will have

disappeared.

*3 - As for how to replace the Paper Feeding Roller, the Separator Pad and the Transfer

Drum, consult your local dealer/retailer.

*4 - Definition of pages: actual output page number.

Definition of images: if the image on a page contains only one color of either

Cyan, Magenta, Yellow or Black=>1 image, two colors => 2 images, three colors

=> 3 images, four colors => 4 images.

✒ Note

Discard the used consumables according to local regulations. If you

are not sure of them, consult your local dealer/retailer. Be sure to seal

up the consumables tightly so that the material inside does not spill

out of the unit. Do not discard used consumables together with

domestic rubbish.

It is recommended to put the used consumables on a piece of paper or

cloth in case of accidental spill or scatter of the material inside.

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-3

✒ Note

If you use paper which is not a direct equivalent for the specified

paper, the life of the various consumables and parts may be reduced.

Approximate lives listed here are based on an average 5% coverage of

the printable area using any one color toner cartridge. The frequency

of replacement will vary depending on the complexity of the printed

pages, the percentage coverage and media type used.

Toner Cartridges

Caution

Be sure to use Brother original toner cartridges. Using other toner

cartridges or refilled toner cartridges may void the warranty for this

printer.

Toner Nearly Empty Message

Check printed pages, page counter, and display messages periodically. If

the indication starts blinking ( ), the printer has nearly run out of

toner or the toner is not evenly distributed inside the cartridge.

   

K C M Y

*K stands for Black, C stands for Cyan, M stands for Magenta and Y

stands for Yellow.

Although you can print approximately 300 (Black) / 500 (Cyan, Magenta

and Yellow) additional pages (at 5% coverage) after the toner low

message first appears, be sure to replace the toner cartridge with a new

one before it becomes completely empty. When the toner becomes

completely empty, the indication on the LCD panel disappears.

Toner Empty Message

When the following messages appear alternately on the LCD panel and

the printer stops printing, replace the Toner Cartridge(s).

16 TONER EMPTY

K COLOR

USER’S GUIDE

5-4

Replacing the Toner Cartridges

Caution

When replacing the Toner Cartridges, handle them carefully so that toner

will not spill.

✒ Note

To ensure optimum print quality, be sure to use quality toner cartridges.

To obtain Brother toner cartridges, consult the dealer where you

purchased the printer.

To replace the toner cartridge(s), follow these steps:

1. Open the Front Cover.

2 Remove the Toner Cartridge(s) which has run out of toner.

3. After rocking each new Toner Cartridge 3 to 4 times, remove the

orange protective cover of the new Toner Cartridge.

Fig. 5-1 Remove the Protective Cover

4. Insert the new Toner Cartridge(s), making sure to insert the correct

cartridge into the correct position referring to the label.

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-5

5. Close the Front Cover.

Caution

Do not stand the toner cartridge on its end or turn it upside down.

Install the toner cartidges immediately after you remove the protective

part. Do not touch the shaded part.

Fig. 5-2 Toner Cartridges

USER’S GUIDE

5-6

Oil Bottle

Oil Bottle Low Message

When the Oil has nearly run out, the following message appears on the

LCD panel. You need to prepare a new Oil Bottle to replace the nearly

empty bottle. After this message appears, you can print approximately 30

pages.

FUSER OIL LOW

Oil Bottle Empty Message

When the Oil runs out, the following message appears on the LCD panel

and the printer stops printing. When you see this message, you need to

replace the Oil Bottle with a new one.

23 OIL EMPTY

Warning

The Fusing unit and the parts around it are HOT. Be sure to wait

about 30 minutes before you start replacing the Oil Bottle.

If you touch the HOT parts, you might get injured.

Caution

Be careful not to spill the oil inside the printer. It might cause damage to

the printer and void your warranty. If you spill any oil, consult your

dealer or our authorized service representative.

Replacing the Oil Bottle

1. Press the Power button to turn the printer off and wait until it cools

down.

2. Open the Top cover.

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-7

3. Release the Oil Bottle Lock Levers as shown below.

Fig. 5-3 Release the Oil Bottle Lock Levers

4. Take the empty Oil Bottle from the Fusing Unit. Place a sheet of

paper under the Oil Bottle so that the oil will not spill into the printer,

and remove the bottle towards the right hand side of the printer. Be

careful not to spill oil inside the printer. It might cause damage to the

printer.

Fig. 5-4 Take the Oil Bottle out

USER’S GUIDE

5-8

5. Install the new Oil Bottle onto the Fusing unit with the label side

facing the front of the printer.

Fig. 5-5 Install the Oil Bottle

6. Lock the Oil Bottle Lock Levers securely.

7. Close the Top Cover.

8. Press the Power button to turn the printer On.

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-9

Fuser Cleaner

Fuser Cleaner Message

When the following message appears on the LCD panel, you need to

prepare a new Fuser Cleaner.

REPLACE FCR

Fuser Cleaner Change Message

When the following message appears on the LCD panel and the printer

stops printing, you need to replace the Fuser Cleaner.

24 CHANGE FCR

Replacing the Fuser Cleaner

Warning

The Fusing unit and the parts around it are HOT. Be sure to wait

about 30 minutes before you start replacing the Fuser Cleaner.

If you touch the HOT parts, you might get injured.

1. Press the Power button to turn the printer off and wait until it cools

down for approximately 30 minutes.

2. Open the Top cover.

3. Release the Oil Bottle Lock Levers on both sides as shown below.

Fig. 5-6 Release the Levers

USER’S GUIDE

5-10

4. Take the Fuser Cleaner out of the Fusing unit by holding the knob

of the Fuser Cleaner.

Fig. 5-7 Take the Fuser Cleaner out

5. Install the new Fuser Cleaner into the guide with the roller side

facing toward you.

Fig. 5-8 Install the Fuser Cleaner

6. Lock the Fuser Cleaner with the Oil Bottle Lock Levers.

7. Close the Top Cover.

8. Press the

Power button and turn the printer on.

9. Press the Sel button and make the printer Off Line.

10.Press the Reset button while holding down the Shift button.

11. When you see “RESET PRINTER” on the LCD panel, press the ▲

(UP) or ▼ (DOWN) button and select “RESET PARTS LIFE” . Press

the Set button and select “FC ROLLER” with the ▲ (UP) or ▼

(DOWN) button.

12.Press the Set button and the printer becomes On Line.

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-11

Waste Toner Pack

Approximately every 12,000 pages you print, you need to change the

Waste Toner Pack.

Waste Toner Pack Full Message

When the West Toner Pack becomes full, the following message appears

on the LCD panel and the printer stops printing. When you see this

message, you need to replace the Waste Toner Pack.

22 WASTE TONER

Caution

Do not re-use the Waste Toner Pack.

Replacing the Waste Toner Pack

Warning

Do not put the Waste Toner Pack containing toner into a fire. It

might cause an explosion.

Be careful not to spill the toner. Do not inhale the toner or allow it

to get into your eyes.

Caution

Be careful when you handle the Waste Toner Pack so that toner will not

spill on your hands or clothes.

USER’S GUIDE

5-12

1. Open the Front Cover.

2. Take the Waste Toner Pack out of the Waste Toner Pack Holder

which is located at the lower right side of the printer. Be careful not to

spill the toner.

Fig. 5-9 Take the Waste Toner Pack out

3. Peel off the sealing sticker on the left hand side of the Waste Toner

Pack. Seal the hole of the Waste Toner Pack with the sealing sticker.

When you throw the used Waste Toner Pack away, put it in the plastic

bag which is enclosed in the Waste Toner Pack carton.

Fig. 5-10 Seal the Sealing Sticker

4. Insert the new Waste Toner Pack into the Waste Toner Pack Holder.

5. Close the Front Cover.

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-13

(OPC) Belt Cartridge

(OPC) Belt Cartridge Message

When the (OPC) Belt Cartridge runs out, the following message appears

on the LCD panel. When you see this message, you need to replace the

(OPC) Belt Cartridge.

REPLACE OPC BELT

Caution

Do not touch the surface of the (OPC) Belt Cartridge. If you touch it,

it might cause print quality reduction.

Do not expose the (OPC) Belt Cartridge to light (more than 800 lux)

for more than 2 minutes. If you do, it might cause reduction of print

quality.

Be sure to open the printer Front Cover when you handle the (OPC)

Belt Cartridge.

Damage caused by improper handling of the (OPC) Belt Cartridge

may void your warranty.

Replacing the (OPC) Belt Cartridge

1. Press the Power button and turn the printer off.

2. Open the Front Cover and the Top cover.

3. Pull the green Belt Cartridge Lock Levers on both sides toward you

to release the lock.

Fig. 5-11 Release the Belt Cartridge Lock Levers

USER’S GUIDE

5-14

4. Take the (OPC) Belt Cartridge out of the printer.

Fig. 5-12 Take the (OPC) Belt Cartridge out

5. Remove the Tension Release Pins from the new (OPC) Belt Cartridge.

Fig. 5-13 Remove the Tension Release Pins

6. Remove the protective sheet of the new (OPC) Belt Cartridge. Do not

touch the green part of the (OPC) Belt Cartridge.

Fig. 5-14 Remove the Protective Sheet

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-15

7. Insert the new Belt Cartridge into the printer along the guide with the

flat side facing toward you.

Fig. 5-15 Insert the new Belt Cartridge

8. Press the Belt Cartridge Lock Levers on both sides of the (OPC) Belt

Cartridge rearwards to lock the cartridge into the printer.

9. Close the Front Cover and the Top Cover.

10.Press the Power button and turn the printer on.

11.Press the Sel button and make the printer Off Line.

12.Press the Reset button while holding down the Shift button.

13.When you see “RESET PRINTER” on the LCD panel, press the ▲

(UP) or ▼ (DOWN) button and select “RESET PARTS LIFE” . Press

the Set button and select “OPC BELT” with the ▲ (UP) or ▼

(DOWN) button.

14.Press the Set button and the printer becomes On Line.

USER’S GUIDE

5-16

Ozone Filter

You need to replace the Ozone Filter once a year to prevent ozone from

coming out of the printer.

Caution

You have to replace the Ozone Filter once a year. If you do not, it might

cause a noticeable smell of Ozone.

Replacing the Ozone Filter

1. Slide and remove the Rear Side Cover . Take the Ozone Filter Case

out which is located inside the Rear Side Cover.

Fig. 5-16 Take the Ozone Filter Case out

2. Remove the Ozone Filter Case from the Ozone Filter Cover.

Fig. 5-17 Remove the Ozone Filter

3. Insert the new Ozone Filter Case into the Ozone Filter Cover.

4. Slide the Rear Side Cover to reinstall it.

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-17

Fusing Unit

When the following message appears on the LCD panel, you need to

replace the Fusing Unit.

REPLACE FUSER

Warning

The Fusing unit and the parts around it are HOT. Be sure to wait

about 30 minutes and check it has cooled down before you start

replacing the Fusing unit.

If you touch the HOT parts, you might get injured.

Caution

When replacing the fusing unit, wait for approximately 30 minutes before

printing after the new unit is installed to allow the fusing oil to circulate

in the new fusing unit.

Replacing the Fusing Unit

1. Press the Power button and turn the printer off and unplug the

printer. Wait for 30 minutes or until the printer has cooled down.

2. Open the Top cover and the Rear Access Cover.

3. Unscrew the screws on both sides inside the Rear Access Cover

and release the metal parts.

Fig. 5-18 Unscrew and release the Metal Parts

USER’S GUIDE

5-18

✒ Note

When you start using a new Fusing Unit, it is possible that initially poor

fixing may occur. If it does, please wait for a while until the oil penetrates

through to the Heat Roller.

4. Take out the Fusing Unit from the printer by holding the handles on

both sides.

Fig. 5-19 Take out the Fusing Unit from the Printer

Caution

When taking the Fusing unit out of the printer, be sure to keep the Fusing

Unit flat, so that oil will not be spilt.

5. Remove the Oil Bottle and the Fuser Cleaner from the Fusing Unit.

6. Install the new Fusing Unit into the printer. Insert the Fusing unit fully

down into the correct position.

Fig. 5-20 Installing the New Fusing unit

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-19

7. Fit the metal parts and secure with the two screws.

Fig. 5-21 Secure the Metal Parts

8. Release the pressure a little with the Pressure Release Levers( ).

Then pull the protective parts between the rollers of the Fusing Unit

out to remove them( ).Make sure that the Pressure Release Levers

are locked when the protective parts have been removed.

Fig. 5-22 Removing the Protective Parts

9. Install the Fuser Cleaner and the Oil bottle into the new Fixing Unit

and Lock the Oil Bottle Lock Levers. Be careful not to spill oil inside

the printer. It might cause damage to the printer.

10.Press the Power button and turn the printer on.

11.Press the Sel button and make the printer Off Line.

12.Press the Reset button while holding down the Shift button.

13.When you see “RESET PRINTER” on the LCD panel, press the ▲

(UP) or ▼ (DOWN) button and select “RESET PARTS LIFE” . Press

the Set button and select “FUSER UNIT” with the ▲ (UP) or ▼

(DOWN) button.

14.Press the Set button and the printer becomes On Line.

Caution

When you replace the Fusing Unit, do the replacement very carefully. Do

not put pressure onto the Fusing unit. If you do, it might cause damage to

the Fusing Unit and / or the printer.

USER’S GUIDE

5-20

120K Kit

When you see the following message on the LCD panel, you need to

replace the Drum Cleaner, Paper Discharger, Transfer Roller, the Paper

Feeding Roller, the Separator Pad and the Transfer Drum.

✒ Note

As for how to replace the Paper Feeding Roller, the Separator Pad and

the Transfer Drum, consult your local dealer/retailer.

We recommend you to consult the dealer where you purchased the

printer when you see following message on the LCD panel.

REPLACE 120K KIT

Drum Cleaner

Caution

The axis holder and bias element must be connected to install the Drum

Cleaner. Be sure to check the connection before you start replacement.

Replacing the Drum Cleaner

1. Press the Power button and turn the printer off.

2. Open the Top cover.

3. Remove the Drum Cover.

Fig. 5-23 Open the Covers

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-21

4. Take the Drum Cleaner out of the printer by holding the knob which

is located on top of the Drum Cleaner. Push the knob forward first

and pull to remove the Drum Cleaner.

Fig. 5-24 Take the Drum Cleaner out

5. Install the new Drum Cleaner into the printer by adjusting the guides

and pushing till it clicks.

Fig. 5-25 Install the New Drum Cleaner

6. Refit the Drum Cover and close the Top Cover.

USER’S GUIDE

5-22

Paper Discharger

Caution

Do not touch the charging wire.

Fig. 5-26 Charging Wire

Replacing the Paper Discharger

1. Open the Rear Access Cover.

2. Remove the Paper Discharger from the Transfer Unit by sliding it to

the right a little bit. Hold the right hand side of the Discharging Unit

and pull to remove it.

Fig. 5-27 Remove the Paper Discharger

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-23

3. Install the new Paper Discharger into theTransfer Unit.

Fig. 5-28 Install the Paper Discharger

USER’S GUIDE

5-24

Replacing the Transfer Roller

1. Release the green Transfer Roller Lock Lever. Lift the Lever to

release the Transfer roller.

Fig. 5-29 Release the Lock Lever

2. Take the Transfer Roller out of the printer by pulling the right hand

side up. Then slide the Transfer roller to the right to remove it.

Fig. 5-30 Take the Transfer Roller out

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-25

3. Install the new Transfer Roller by putting the left side pin of the

Transfer Roller into the boss on the left hand side of the unit. Adjust

and place the right side knob of the Transfer Roller into the holder.

Fig. 5-31 Install the Transfer Roller

4. Lock the Transfer Roller with the Transfer Roller Lock Levers.

5. Close the Rear Access Cover.

6. Plug in the printer and press the Power button to turn the printer on.

7. Press the Sel button and make the printer Off Line.

8. Press the Reset button while holding down the Shift button.

9. When you see “RESET PRINTER” on the LCD panel, press the ▲

(UP) or ▼ (DOWN) button and select “RESET PARTS LIFE” . Press

the Set button and select “120K KIT” with the ▲ (UP) or ▼ (DOWN)

button.

10.Press the Set button and the printer printer becomes On Line.

USER’S GUIDE

5-26

CLEANING THE PRINTER

Clean the printer exterior and interior periodically with a dry soft cloth. If

the printed page gets stained with toner, clean the printer interior with a

dry soft cloth.

Cleaning the Printer Exterior

Clean the printer exterior as follows:

1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.

2. Remove the Media Cassette.

3. Wipe the printer body with a soft cloth to remove dust from it.

Dip the cloth in water and wring it out thoroughly for cleaning.

✒ Note

Use water for cleaning. Cleaning with volatile liquids such as thinner or

benzine damages the surface of the printer.

Do not use cleaning materials that contain ammonia. It might damage the

printer, particularly the toner cartridge.

Fig. 5-32 Cleaning the Printer Exterior

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-27

Periodical Printer Cleaning

Every 20,000 pages printed or every 12 months, clean the following parts with

a dry cloth.

Clean the Paper Guide and Registration Roller to prevent paper mis-picking.

Fig. 5-33-1 Paper Guide and Registration Roller

Clean the Exit Roller after opening the Top Cover slightly. This will help

to prevent paper jams at the paper exit or dirt appearing on the printed

paper.

Fig. 5-33-2 Top cover and Exit Roller

USER’S GUIDE

5-28

REPACKING AND RELOCATING THE PRINTER

Caution

Whenever you transport the printer use the packing materials which

are provided with your printer. Also, follow the steps below to re-pack

the printer, or the printer may be damaged which will void the

printer’s warranty.

Before you ship or move the printer, be sure to take out the following

items and put them in separate bags (Do not put them in the printer

carton box);

* the Fusing unit

* the Waste Toner Pack

* the Toner Cartridges

* the (OPC) Belt Cartridge

Wipe off any Oil from the Fusing unit after removing the Oil bottle

from it.

Before you move the printer, be sure to remove the Fusing Unit,

remove the Oil Bottle from the Fusing Unit and then remove the

remaining oil in the Fusing Unit using the Oil Syringe. Discard the oil

according to local regulations.

Fig. 5-33-3 Removing the Oil

How to Repack the Printer

1. Press Power button and unplug the printer.

2. Remove the Waste Toner Pack, the Toner Cartridges, the Fusing Unit

and the (OPC) Belt Cartridge from the printer and replace them in their

original packaging. However, do not put them in the printer carton

box.

3. Put the printer in the original packing material and into the original

carton box.

4. Close the carton box and tape it securely.

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-29

OPTIONS

Lower Tray Unit

Loading Paper from the Lower Media Cassette

The lower tray unit is a device that functions as a second paper source

which can contain a maximum of 250 sheets of paper (160 g/m2 or 43

lbs). For the optional lower tray unit, consult the dealer where you

purchased the printer.

With the lower tray unit installed, load paper into the lower paper cassette

in the same way as you do the upper media cassette.

How to Install the Lower Tray Unit

Warning

This printer is heavy and weighs approximately 36kg (79.37lbs).

When you move or lift this printer, be sure at least 2 people lift it

together, so that you will not hurt your back.

Be sure to lift the printer using the handholds which are located at

the four corners at the bottom of the printer, so that the printer

will not trap your hands.

Caution

When you move or lift this printer, be sure to keep the printer flat and

remove Toner Cartridges, Waste Toner Pack, Oil Bottle and Fusing Unit

first so that they will not spill.

1. Place the Lower Tray Unit on a flat table. Pull out the connection

cable which is located at the rear left hand side of the printer.

Fig. 5-34 Pull out the Connection Cable

USER’S GUIDE

5-30

2. Check the three alignment pins on the Lower Tray Unit. Use two

people to Lift the printer and put it onto the Lower Tray Unit. Be sure

to use the handholds which are located at four corners at the bottom of

the printer. Check to see if the alignment pins locate correctly into the

printer.

3. Insert the Metal Parts into both sides of the Lower Tray Unit from

above and secure with the screws.

Fig. 5-35 Insert the Metal Parts and Secure with the Screws

4. Insert the connection cable to the printer’s connector.

Fig. 5-36 Insert the Connection Cable

5. Fit the covers on both sides of the Lower Tray Unit.

Fig. 5-37 Fit the Cover

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-31

✒ Note

Do not load B5 or smaller size paper and envelopes in the cassette which

is loaded into the optional Lower Tray Unit. It might cause paper jams.

Font Card, Flash Memory/HDD Card

Installing a Font Card, Flash Memory Card and HDD Card

This printer has two slots for an optional font cartridge and one slot for an

optional font card, flash memory card or HDD card. (Type III HDD cards

will only fit into card slot 2.)

If you have installed optional font card(s), you can use the fonts stored in

them as well as the resident fonts. For optional font cards, consult the

dealer where you purchased the printer.

If you have installed an optional flash memory card or HDD card, you

can save macros and fonts on it. For flash memory card and HDD card

operations and information, see “CARD OPERATION” in Chapter 4.

✒ Notes

Do not install or remove cards with the printer power on, or you may

lose all data from the card, or may seriously damage the card.

For more information about the cards, consult the dealer where you

purchased the printer.

For the latest information: http://www.brother.com

Follow these steps to install or remove a cartridge/card:

1. Make sure that the printer is turned off.

If the printer is turned on, be sure to press the Sel button to set the

printer off-line. If data remains in the printer memory, the Data LED

stays on. Press the Form Feed button to print out the remaining data,

then the Data LED goes off. Turn off the printer.

2. Insert an HDD card into slot 2 with the label facing to the right. It is

not possible to fit a card into slot 1 with a Type III PCMCIA card

fitted in slot 2.

3. Fit a flash memory or font card into either slot 1 or slot 2 with the

label facing to the right. Make sure they are inserted correctly.

To remove a card, pull it out of the slot with the printer turned off.

USER’S GUIDE

5-32

The following type of flash memory card can be installed:

• 4 Mbyte : Fujitsu MB98A81273

• 8 Mbyte : Fujitsu MB98A81373

• 16 Mbyte : Fujitsu MB98A81473

• 32 Mbyte : Fujitsu MB98A81573

• 1 Mbyte : AMD AMC001CFLKA

• 2 Mbyte : AMD AMC002CFLKA

• 4 Mbyte : AMD AMC004CFLKA

• 10 Mbyte : AMD AMC010CFLKA

• 4 Mbyte : AMD AMC004DFLKA

• 8 Mbyte : AMD AMC008DFLKA

• 20 Mbyte : AMD AMC020DFLKA

• 2-85 Mbyte : SanDisk PCMCA PC Card ATA

The following type of HDD card can be installed:

• 170 Mbyte : Intégral Peripherals Inc. VIPER 170E

Fig. 5-38 Installing or Removing the Card

✒ Notes

There might be some HDD cards which will not work with this

printer.

For more information about the cards, consult the dealer where you

purchased the printer.

For the latest information: http://www.brother.com

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-33

Selecting the Optional Fonts

After you have installed the optional font card, you can select optional

fonts by any of the following methods:

1. Through your application software

2. With a font selection command

3. With the Font button

When you select fonts through your application software, follow the

instructions specific to your software. Refer to your software manual if

you need assistance. When you select fonts with a font selection

command, embed the font selection command in your program. See the

Technical Reference Manual, which is optionally available for this

printer.

✒ Notes

When you select the fonts through your software or with a command,

note the following:

You do not need to be concerned about the Font button setting. The

software or command setting overrides the button setting.

Be sure to install the font card that has your desired fonts. The printer

automatically selects the font that has exactly the same or similar

characteristics as those you set through the software or with a

command. If the installed font card happens to have a font of similar

characteristics, the printer will print in an unexpected font.

To select fonts with the Font button, follow these basic steps:

1. Print out the list of optional fonts in the PRINT FONTS C mode with

the Shift and Test buttons.

2. Find the font slot and font ID number on the list.

Fig. 5-39 Font ID Numbers on the Font List

Font ID Number Slot 1 or 2

USER'S GUIDE

5-34

3.Select the font with the Font button.

See “FONT button” in Chapter 4.

Modular I/O Card

Before installing the NC-2010h Network card, please note the following

information.

Before NC-2010h Installation

(USA)

When you install the NC-2010h Ethernet interface card, this printer

complies with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of

the FCC Rules.

Please refer to the NC-2010h User’s Guide for the FCC notice.

(CANADA)

When you install the NC-2010h Ethernet interface card, this printer

complies with the limits for a Class A digital apparatus, pursuant to

Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

(Europe)

When you install the NC-2010h Ethernet interface card, this printer

complies with EN 55022 Class A.

Warning

In a domestic environment, the printer used with an NC-2010h

Network card may cause radio interference, in which cause the user

may be required to take adequate measures.

This printer has a modular input/output (MIO) interface slot on the rear

panel. This slot allows you to install a commercial MIO-compatible

sharing/network card.

For more information about MIO cards, consult the dealer where you

purchased this printer.

When you install the MIO card, follow these steps:

1.Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord from the wall socket.

✒ Note

Be sure to turn off the power to the printer before installing or

removing the MIO card.

Be sure to remove the interface cable connector when installing the

MIO card.

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-35

2. Remove the two screws and cover plate from the MIO interface slot.

3. Unpack the MIO card and hold it by its edge.

✒ Note

Do not touch the card surface. If static electricity collects, it damages the

card.

4. Insert the card until it is securely seated.

5. Secure the MIO card with the two captive screws on the card.

6. Retain the cover plate and two screws removed in 2 in case you want

to remove the MIO card later.

Fig. 5-40 Installing the MIO Card

RAM Expansion

This printer has 16 Mbytes or 32 Mbytes of memory standard, depending

on the printer model, and 3 slots for optional expansion memory. The

memory can be expanded up to 112 Mbytes by installing commercially

available single in-line memory modules (SIMMs). (The standard

memory fitted can vary depending on the printer model and country.)

MIO Card

MIO Interface Slot

USER’S GUIDE

5-36

The following capacity of SIMM can be installed:

• 1 Mbyte HITACHI HB56D25632B-6A, -7A, -8A

MITSUBISHI MH25632BJ-7, -8

• 2 Mbyte HITACHI HB56D51232B-6A, -7A, -8A

MITSUBISHI MH51232BJ-7, -8

• 4 Mbyte HITACHI HB56A132BV-7A, -7AL, -7B, -7BL, -8AL, -8B,

-8BL

MITSUBISHI MH1M32ADJ-7, -8

• 8 Mbyte HITACHI HB56A232BT-7A, -7AL, -7B, -7BL

MITSUBISHI MH2M32EJ-7, -8, MH2M32DJ-7, -8

• 16 Mbyte TOSHIBA THM324000BSG-60, -70, -80

• 32 Mbyte TOSHIBA THM328020BSG-60, -70, -80

In general, the SIMM must have the following specifications:

Type: 72 pin and 32 bit or 36 bit output

Access Time: 80 nsec. or less

Capacity: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32 Mbyte

Height: 46mm (1.8 inches) or less

Parity: NONE

EDO RAM can be used.

✒ Notes

There might be some SIMMs which will not work with this printer.

For more information about the cards, consult the dealer where you

purchased the printer.

For the latest information: http://www.brother.com

There are 40 bit output SIMMs for workstations. Such SIMMs do not fit

this printer.

For SIMMs and installation, consult the dealer where you purchased the

printer.

✒ Note

This printer has 3 SIMM slots. The maximum size for each slot is a

32MB SIMM. For the 32MB standard memory model, a 16MB SIMM is

pre-installed. If you want to expand the RAM size to 112MB, replace the

16MB SIMM with a 32MB SIMM.

When you install SIMMs, follow these steps:

1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.

✒ Note

Be sure to turn off the power to the printer before installing or removing

the SIMMs.

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE

5-37

2. Unscrew the two screws securing the rear plate of the main controller

board and pull out the main controller board.

Fig. 5-41 Removing the Main Controller Board

3. Unpack the SIMM and hold it by its edge.

Caution

Do not touch the memory chips and the surface of the main controller

board. If static electricity collects, it may damage these electrical parts.

4. Install the SIMM into the slot and push gently until it clicks into

place.

Fig. 5-42 Install the SIMM

5. Install as many SIMMs as you need.

• Set the SIMM into the slot at an angle.

• Push the top of the SIMM gently towards the vertical until it clicks

into place.

USER’S GUIDE

5-38

✒ Notes

When you install less than two SIMMs, be sure to install them in the

order Slot 1and then Slot2.

When you install different capacities of SIMMs, be sure to install the

larger capacity SIMMs in the lower socket and smaller capacity

SIMMs in order in the upper sockets.

6. Install the main controller board into the printer by sliding it into the

guide rails.

Fig. 5-43 Install the Main Controller board

7. Secure the main controller board with the two screws.

8. Reconnect the interface cable (printer cable) from your computer.

Plug the power cord into the AC outlet and turn the printer on.

9. To check whether the SIMM has installed correctly, you may perform

a Test Print “Print Configuration” which will print the current

memory size.

CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING

6–1

CHAPTER 6

TROUBLE SHOOTING

TROUBLESHOOTING

If any problems occur, the printer automatically stops printing, diagnoses

the problem, and displays the corresponding message to alert you. Take

the appropriate action, referring to the following tables. If you cannot

clear the problem, consult the dealer where you purchased the printer.

Inform the dealer of the message number for quick troubleshooting.

Operator Call Messages

When any of the following messages appear, the printer stops operating.

Operator Call Message Meaning Action

CHECK XXXXXXX Check the paper tray.

XXXXXXX is TRAY 1/

TRAY 2.

Check the adjustment lever at

the bottom of the upper paper

cassette and adjust to the

correct setting in when the

CHECK TRAY 1 message

appears.

Load a stack of paper into the

cassette.

12 COVER OPEN

FRONT

The Front cover of the printer

is open. Close the Front cover.

12 COVER OPEN

TOP

The Top cover of the printer is

open. Close the Top cover.

12 COVER OPEN

REAR

The Rear Access cover of the

printer is open. Close the Rear Access cover.

13 JAM XXXXXX Paper is jammed in the

printer. XXXXXX is DRUM/

FEEDER/ INSIDE/ REAR.

Remove the jammed paper

from the indicated area.

See ‘Paper Jams’ section in

this chapter.

14 NO CARTRIDGE

XXXX COLOR

A toner cartridge is not

installed in the printer.XXXX

indicates colors.

Install the toner cartridge.

XX NO CASSETTE The Media Cassette is not

installed. XX is T1/ T2. Install the Media Cassette.

16 TONER EMPTY

XXXX COLOR

The printer has almost run out

of toner: you may print

another 50 pages. (The Alarm

LED lights at the same time.)

XXXX indicates colors.

Remove the toner cartridge,

rock it several times at 45°,

and install it again or replace

the toner cartridge with a new

one.

USER’S GUIDE

6–2

Operator Call Message Meaning Action

XX LOAD PAPER

***** SIZE

The wrong size of paper was

loaded in the Media Cassette.

XX is T1/ T2.

Load the requested size of

paper in the Media Cassette

and press the Form Feed

button.

T1 MANUAL FEED

***** SIZE

The printer requests you to

load paper manually. Load the requested size of

paper on the Standard Media

Cassette and press the Sel

button.

19 CHECK FONT An error occurred in the

optional font card. Turn off the printer, and re-

install or replace the optional

font card.

20 FONT REMOVAL The PCMCIAcard was

removed while the printer is

on-line.

Turn off the printer, install the

card, and turn on the printer.

The Continue button will

allow you to temporarily

ignore this message.

22 WASTE TONER The Waste Toner Pack is full. Replace the Waste Toner Pack

with a new one.

23 OIL EMPTY The Oil in the Oil Bottle is

empty. Replace the Oil Bottle with a

new one.

24 CHANGE FCR It is time to replace the Fuser

Cleaner. Replace the Fuser Cleaner

with a new one.

25 NO FUSER UNIT The Fixing Unit is not

installed correctly. Install the Fixing Unit

correctly.

27 NO OPC BELT The (OPC) Belt Cartridge is

not installed correctly. Install the (OPC) Belt

Cartridge correctly.

28 NO FC ROLLER The Cleaning Roller is not

installed correctly. Install the Cleaning Roller

correctly.

CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING

6–3

Maintenance Messages (appear on the lower row)

Error Message Meaning Action

FUSER OIL LOW The Oil in the Oil Bottle is

almost empty. Replace the Oil Bottle.

REPLACE FCR It is time to replace the

Cleaning Roller. Replace the Cleaning Roller.

REPLACE OPC BELT It is time to replace the (OPC)

Belt Cartridge. Replace the (OPC) Belt

Cartridge.

REPLACE FUSER It is time to replace the Fixing

Unit. Replace the Fixing Unit.

REPLACE 120K KIT It is time to replace the Drum

Cleaner, Paper Discharger and

Transfer Roller.

Replace the Drum Cleaner,

Paper Discharger and Transfer

Roller.

USER’S GUIDE

6–4

Error Messages

Error Message Meaning Action

32 BUFFER ERROR Input buffer overflow Reset the printer or turn off

and on the printer.

34 MEMORY FULL Work memory overflow Press the Continue button to

resume printing. If the same

error should occur after you

press the Continue button,

turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

Reduce the input buffer size.

Turn off “KEEP PCL.” Add

SIMM memory with printer

power off. Download font and

the fonts saved in the HDD

card might cause the error, for

these occupy the same work

area as the RAM. Memory

expansion is recommended in

that case.

40 LINE ERROR Error in the communications

circuit When the serial interface is

used, check the

communications parameters

such as baud rate, code type,

parity, and handshake

protocols. When the parallel

interface is used, check the

interface cable connection.

41 PRINT CHECK Error in communication with

the engine controller Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING

6–5

Error Message Meaning Action

42 CARD 1(2)

FULL

Card in slot 1 or 2 overflow Delete unnecessary macros or fonts, or

use a new card.

43 CARD1(2)W

ERROR

Card in slot 1 or 2 write error Set the write protect button of the card to

OFF if it has been set to ON. Use a new

card. If the same error occurs, consult

your dealer or service personnel.

45 MIO ERROR Error in communication with the

MIO card Install the MIO card correctly.

47 CARD1(2)R

ERROR

Card in slot 1 or 2 read error Use a new card. If the same error occurs,

consult your dealer or service personnel.

IGNORE DATA

(BR-Script 2 mode only)

Data is ignored because of an

error in the PostScript® language

program.

Press the Reset button.

If the same error occurs, you may need to

add optional SIMM memory.

USER’S GUIDE

6–6

Service Call Messages

When any of the following messages appear on the LCD, turn the printer

Off , wait 5 seconds and then turn the printer On again. If this does not

clear the problem, consult your dealer or our authorized service

representative.

Service Call Message Meaning Action

61 PROG ERROR Program ROM checksum

error

Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

62 FONT ERROR Font ROM checksum error Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

63 D-RAM ERROR D-RAM error Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

66 NV-W ERROR NV-RAM write error Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

67 NV-R ERROR NV-RAM read error Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

68 NV-B ERROR NV-RAM write / read error Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

99 SERVICE C3 Engine NV-RAM error Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

99 SERVICE C4 Engine controller error Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

99 SERVICE C7 Process timing clock error Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

99 SERVICE D1 Y switching clutch error Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

99 SERVICE D2 M switching clutch error Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

99 SERVICE 2 Address error Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

99 SERVICE 3 Address error Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

99 SERVICE 4 Bus error Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

99 SERVICE 5 Bus error Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

99 SERVICE 6 Privileged instruction Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

99 SERVICE 8 Illegal instruction Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

99 SERVICE 9 No FPU Turn off the printer. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING

6–7

Service Call Message Meaning Action

99 SERVICE D3 C switching clutch error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE D4 K switching clutch error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE D5 K,Y switching solenoid error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE D6 C, M switching solenoid error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE E1 Developing motor error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE E2 Main motor error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE E3 Drum error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE E4 Toner empty sensor error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE E5 Transfer Roller solenoid error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE E6 Drum cleaning solenoid error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE E7 Drum cleaning clutch error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE E8 Fusing Unit clutch error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE E9 Belt marker sensor error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE EL Erase LED error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE F0 Cooling fan error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

USER’S GUIDE

6–8

Service Call Message Meaning Action

99 SERVICE F2 Ozone fan error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE F4 Fuser fan error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE F5 Charge HV unit error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE H0 Fuser thermistor error Turn off the printer. Wait 15

minutes, then turn it on again.

99 SERVICE H2 Fuser temperature error

(Warming up time error)

Turn off the printer. Wait 15

minutes, then turn it on again.

99 SERVICE H3 Fuser temperature error

(On time error)

Turn off the printer. Wait 15

minutes, then turn it on again.

99 SERVICE H4 Fuser temperature error

(Off time error)

Turn off the printer. Wait 15

minutes, then turn it on again.

99 SERVICE L1 Beam detector error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE L2 Scanner motor error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

99 SERVICE LL Laser power error Turn off the printer. Wait a

few seconds, then turn it on

again.

CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING

6–9

Paper Jams

This printer has been designed to be trouble free. However, if any

problem should occur, note the display message and take the appropriate

action. This section describes the actions to be taken against paper jams

and unsatisfactory printouts.

Paper Jam

If paper jams in the printer, it stops printing and displays the following

message.

13 JAM XXXXXX

✒ Notes

If paper jams occur frequently, check the adjustment lever located in the

bottom of the Media Cassette or clean the printer interior and check the

paper quality.

About the Adjustment Lever

If paper is misfeeding or doublefeeding frequently, set the adjustment

lever according to the table below.

Recommended Paper Size

I. Backwards : letter, legal*, A4, B5(ISO,JIS), Executive and A5

II. Forwards : COM10, C5 and DL

*Legal Cassette only

If CHECK TRAY is shown when the Media Cassette is filled with paper,

check the adjustment lever and adjust it to the correct setting.

Fig. 6-1 Adjustment Lever

Do not use the following paper:

Bent paper

Moist paper

Paper that does not meet specifications

Paper may jam in the Media Cassette, inside the printer, at the Rear

Access Cover or at the paper exit. Check the jam location and follow the

instructions below to remove the jammed paper.

USER’S GUIDE

6–10

After you have followed the instructions, the printer automatically

resumes printing. However, the Data LED may come on and the

following message may appear on the display.

07 FF PAUSE

After a paper jam has occurred, data usually remains in the printer

memory. The message prompts you to execute a form feed and print out

the remaining data. Press the Set button to continue.

■Paper Jam at Paper Exit

13 JAM REAR

If paper has passed behind the Rear Access Cover and a paper jam has

occurred at the paper exit, follow the steps below;

1. Open the Top Cover and release the Pressure Release Lever.

Fig. 6-2 Paper Jam at Paper Exit

2. Open the Rear Access Cover and remove the jammed paper by pulling

it out slowly.

Fig. 6-3 Remove the jammed paper

CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING

6–11

3. Close the Rear Access Cover.

✒ Note

When paper jams at the Rear Access Cover increase, replace the Paper

Discharger.

■Paper Jam at Fusing Roller inside the printer

13 JAM INSIDE or 13 JAM DRUM

If a paper jam occurs at the Fusing Roller, follow the steps to remove the

jammed paper in the same way as for ‘Paper Jam at Paper Exit’.

Otherwise, follow the steps below.

Warning

The Fusing Roller is extremely hot during operation. Remove the

paper carefully.

1. Open the Rear Access Cover.

2. Remove the jammed paper by holding it with both hands and pulling

it slowly towards you.

Fig. 6-4 Paper Jam Inside

3. Close the Rear Access Cover.

USER’S GUIDE

6–12

Caution

Do not touch the toner surface of the jammed paper. It might stain

your hands or clothes.

After having removed the jammed paper, if the printed paper has a

stain, print several pages before restarting your printing.

Remove the jammed paper carefully so as not to spread toner.

Take care not to stain your hands and clothes with toner. Wash toner

stains immediately with cold water.

Never touch the transfer roller.

■Paper Jam in the Media Cassette

13 JAM TRAYS

If a paper jam occurs inside the Media Cassette, follow these steps:

1. Pull out the Media Cassette.

2. Remove the jammed paper.

Fig. 6-5 Paper Jam at Media Cassette

3. Install the Media Cassette.

Caution

Do not pull out the upper Media Cassette while paper is being fed from

the optional lower Media Cassette, or it will cause a paper jam.

CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING

6–13

Q & A

This section contains commonly asked questions and the answers

concerning your printer. If you have encountered a problem, try to find

the question relating to your problem and take the steps recommended to

correct the problem.

Setting Up the Printer Hardware

Question Recommendation

The printer does not come on. Check the following;

The printer is securely plugged into the AC outlet

The power source is active.

The Power button is on.

The printer does not print. Check the following:

The printer is turned on.

The printer is Online.

All of the protective parts have been removed.

All the covers on the printer are closed.

The toner cartridges are installed properly.

The ‘toner empty’ message is not displayed on

the LCD. If one or more are on, replace the toner

cartridges.

The interface cable is securely connected between

the printer and computer.

The Alarm LED is blinking. If the LED is

blinking, refer to the Operator Call section of this

manual.

The HL-2400C printer is selected in the printer

settings in your application.

The host is configured correctly: check printer

port, print manager etc. (clear stored job or ‘use

print manager’ is selected off)

There is no jammed paper inside the printer.

Paper is loaded in the Media Cassette.

An Error message is not displayed.

USER’S GUIDE

6–14

Setting Up the Printer

Question Recommendation

I cannot print from my

application software. • Make sure the supplied Windows printer driver is

installed correctly and selected in your application

software.

I cannot print the entire page. • Check to see if the size of paper in the feeder is

the same as the one that you have selected in your

application or the printer driver.

• Check to see if the interface cable is connected to

the printer and computer securely.

Computer indicates a device

time-out. • If the Alarm LED is blinking, clear it referring to

the ‘Alarm Indications at a Glance’ section in this

chapter and try to print again.

• If the Alarm LED is off, wait a short while and

then click on the Retry button on the PC screen

dialog box.

Check to see if the printer is On-line

Computer indicates Paper

Empty. Paper is empty. Load paper in the Feeder and push

the On Line button to recover from the error status..

Computer indicates Off Line Press the On Line button to make the printer ready.

Computer indicates Power Off Check if the printer is securely plugged into the AC

outlet and the Power button is on.

Computer indicates an error

message other than above. Check the following;

• The computer can work in bi-directional mode.

• The printer port is correct.

• Selection of the printer is correct.

• Recommended interface cable is being

used.(IEEE 1284 compliant)

Or select the ‘Control’ tag in the driver and set the

‘Status Monitor’ to off.

If you install the printer driver

for HL-2400C from the Plug &

Play installation, the

installation may sometimes fail

with the following error dialog.

Please reinstall the printer driver by clicking the ‘Add

Printer’ icon on the Settings-Printer dialog.

CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING

6–15

Paper Handling

Question Recommendation

The printer does not load

paper. Check to see if the Alarm LED is on. If so, the

Media Cassette may be out of paper or not

properly installed. If it is empty, load a new stack

of paper into the Media Cassette.

If there is paper in the Media Cassette, make sure

that it is straight. If the paper is curled, you should

straighten it before printing. Sometimes it is

helpful to remove the paper, turn the stack over

and replace it in the paper tray.

Reduce the stack of paper in the Media Cassette,

then try again.

How can I load envelopes? You can load envelopes from the Media Cassette.

Make sure to adjust the paper guide. Your

application software also must be set up correctly to

print on the envelope size you are using. This is

usually done in the page setup or document setup

menu of your software. Refer to your applications

manual for further information.

What paper can I use? See ‘Paper Handling’ in Chapter 3 for detailed paper

specifications.

How can I clear paper jams? See “PAPER JAMS”section in this chapter.

The printer loads more than

one sheet at a time. Check to see if:

The paper loaded is all the same type.

Paper that meets the specifications is loaded.

Papers were fanned before loading.

The stack of paper is not too high.

The side guide is not set too tight.

The printer doesn’t eject paper. Set the printer Off-line, then push the Form Feed

button. Then push the On Line button.

Paper loads skewed. Check the following;

The side guide is adjusted correctly.

The amount of paper you have loaded is correct.

Refer to ‘Loading Paper in the Media Cassette’

section in Chapter 2.

Sometimes mis-picking of

paper from the paper tray or

mis-feeding of paper from the

paper exit occurs.

Clean the Paper Guide, the Registration Roller and

the Exit Roller referring to ‘Periodical Printer

Cleaning’ in Chapter 5.

USER’S GUIDE

6–16

Printing

Question Recommendation

The printer prints unexpectedly

or it prints incorrect characters. Cancel the print job from your computer. Then,

turn on and off the printer or reset the printer and

try your print job again.

Make sure your application software is correctly

set up to use this printer and check the printer

driver settings or printer settings in your

application software.

The computer hangs up when

the printer starts printing, or an

application error occurs.

Check to see if the system resources are enough (PC

memory, etc). When you have many applications

open, the system resources of your PC will not be

enough and your PC will hang up. Close applications

you are not using and try again.

My headers or footers appear

when I view my document on

screen but do not show up

when I print them.

Most laser printers have a restricted area that cannot

be printed on. Adjust the top and bottom margins in

your document to allow for this.

Printing takes too long. When you print color graphic images, there is a

large amount of data and the printer will take a

relatively long time to complete printing.

When you print in Super Fine mode, the printer

will take a relatively long time to finish printing.

When the Data LED is blinking, the printer is

making itself ready to print. Printing speed

depends on memory size or performance of your

PC and memory size of the printer.

The printer doesn’t print in

color The printer may be set in monochrome mode.

Check that the color toner(s) have not run out.

CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING

6–17

Print Quality

✒Note

You can clear a print quality problem by replacing a toner cartridge with

a new one if the LCD indicates the ‘toner low’ or ‘toner empty’ message.

Question Recommendation

White horizontal lines or bands

or rubbing

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

1) Check the printer is installed on a solid, level

surface.

2) Check the rear access cover is closed correctly.

3) Check the toner cartridges is installed correctly.

4) Shake the toner cartridges gently

Colors are light or unclear in

the whole page

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

1) Check the specified paper is used.

2) Check the problem is solved after change to fresh

unpacked paper.

3) Check the rear access cover is closed correctly.

4) Shake the toner cartridges gently

White vertical streaks or bands

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Check which color is missing and replace the toner

cartridge

*The toner has probably come to the end of its life.

However, when you see a white vertical line on the

toner roller, try the following procedure.

1. Cut a sheet approx. 50mm x 50mm out of a

transparency film.

2. Insert the film about 10mm into the gap between the

toner roller and the blade.

3. Slide the film and pull it out as shown below.

USER’S GUIDE

6–18

Question Recommendation

Black vertical streaks or bands

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

1) Check which color is missing and replace the toner

cartridge

2) Replace the OPC belt cartridge

Black (colored) horizontal lines

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Check which color is missing and replace the toner

cartridge.

White spots or hollow print

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

1) Check the problem is solved after change to fresh

unpacked paper.

2) Check the specified paper is used.

3) Check the room temperature is higher than 10

degrees C.

Completely blank or some

colors are missing

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

1) Check which color is missing and check the toner

cartridge is installed correctly.

2) Replace the toner cartridge

3) Replace the OPC belt cartridge

Black (colored) spots or Toner

stain

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Contact your dealer or our authorized service

representative.

CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING

6–19

Question Recommendation

Toner scatter or Toner stain

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

1) Check which color is the problem and replace the

toner cartridge

2) Replace the OPC belt cartridge

The color of your printouts are

not what you expected 1) Check the test print from the control panel.

2) Check the toner cartridges are installed correctly.

3) Check the toner cartridges are not empty.

4) You can adjust the color by using the custom setting

in the driver. Colors which the printer can express

and colors you see on a monitor are somewhat

different. The printer may not be able to express

exactly some colors on your monitor.

5) Check the specified paper is used.

All one color Replace the OPC belt cartridge

Dirt on back of paper

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

1) Replace the oil bottle

2) Replace the cleaning roller

Shade on the transparency 1) Check the problem is solved after changing to the

recommended type of transparency.

2) Check the media type mode is selected correctly

Color misregistration

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

1) Check the OPC belt cartridge is installed correctly.

2) Replace the OPC belt cartridge

USER’S GUIDE

6–20

Question Recommendation

Uneven density appears

periodically in the horizontal

direction

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

1) Check the toner cartridges are installed correctly.

2) Check the OPC belt cartridge is installed correctly

Missing image at edge

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

1) Replace the toner cartridge

2) Replace the OPC belt cartridge

Wrinkle

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

1) Check the problem is solved after changing to

recommended type of paper.

2) Check the rear access cover is closed correctly.

3) Check the paper discharger is installed correctly.

Mixed color image

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

1) Check the front cover is closed correctly.

2) Check the toner cartridges are installed correctly.

3) Replace the toner cartridges

Insufficient Gloss 1) Check the oil is not empty.

2) Replace the cleaning roller.

3) Check that specified paper is used.

CHAPTER 6 TROUBLESHOOTING

6–21

Question Recommendation

Off set image

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

1) Check that specified paper is used.

2) Check the oil is not empty.

3) Replace the cleaning roller

Poor fixing

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

1) Check that specified paper is used.

2) Check the media type mode is selected correctly.

Poor fixing Wait for a while and try again.

Poor fixin

when

rinted on

thick

er Set the

rinter to thick

er mode throu

h the control

anel or the

rinter driver.

Blurred vertical band and spots

of colour.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Clean the Char

Wire as shown below.

1. O

en the Front Cover and take the Cleanin

Brush

out of the

rinter.

2. O

en the To

Cover and take the (OPC) Belt

Cartrid

e out of the

rinter.

3. Brush the Char

Wire with the Cleanin

brush as

shown below.

Dirt on the printed paper.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Clean the Pa

er Guide, the Re

istration Roller and the

Exit Roller referrin

to ‘Periodical Printer Cleanin

’ in

Cha

ter 5.

If the same problem still occurs, contact your dealer or our authorized service

representative.

USER’S GUIDE

6–22

Caution

Operation of the printer outside the specifications shall be deemed abuse

and all repairs thereafter shall be the sole liability of the end

user/purchaser.

APPENDICES

A-1

APPENDICES

PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS

Printing

Print Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser beam

scanning

Laser Wavelength: 780 nm

Output: 5 mW max.

Resolution 300 dots per inch (Normal)

600 dots per inch (Fine)

(The resolution can be enhanced to 2400 dpi class by

using the HRC (High Resolution Control) and CAPT

(Color Advanced Photoscale Techology) features.)

Print Speed 16 pages per minute (A4/Letter size in monochrome)

4 pages per minute (A4/Letter size in full color)

Warm Up Max. 3.5 minutes at 20°C (68°F)

First Print Monochrome: 19 seconds or less

Full Color: 30 seconds or less

(A4/Letter size by face down print delivery from

standard upper cassette feed)

Print Media Toner in a single color single-component cartridge

Life Expectancy: 10,000 (Black): 6,000 (Cyan,

Magenata and Yellow) single-sided pages/cartridge (A4

or letter size paper with about 5% coverage).

Resident Printer Fonts • HP PCL, EPSON FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL

modes

66 scalable fonts and 12 bitmapped fonts

• BR-Script Level 2 mode

66 scalable fonts

USER’S GUIDE

A-2

Functions

CPU MB86832 (SPARC architecture)

Emulation Automatic emulation selection

• HP Color Printer (PCL5C ) including HP LaserJet

4+ (PCL 5e) and HP LaserJet 5 (PCL 6)

• BR-Script Level 2 (Adobe Postscript Level 2

compatible)

•HP-GL

• EPSON FX-850

• IBM Proprinter XL

Interface Automatic interface selection among bi-directional

parallel, RS-232C serial and MIO interface.

RAM Standard mode: 16 Mbyte

Network model: 32 Mbyte

(expandable to 112 Mbytes with SIMMs)

The standard memory fitted can vary depending on the

printer model and country.

Card Slots 2 slots for PCMCIA Type I, II

1 card slot: PCMCIA Type III Compatible for FLASH

Memory or HDD cards

Control Panel 8 switches, 4 lamps, and 16-column by 2-lines liquid

crystal display

Diagnostics Self-diagnostic program

APPENDICES

A-3

Electrical and Mechanical

Power Source U.S.A. and Canada: AC 120 V, 50/60 Hz

Europe and Australia: AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption Printing: 450 W or less

Stand-by: 150 W or less

Stand-by in sleep mode: 25 W or less

Noise Printing: 55 dB A or less

Stand-by: 48 dB A or less

Temperature Operating: 10 to 32.5°C (50°F to 90.5°F)

Non operational: 5 to 35°C (41°F to 95°F)

Storage: 0 to 35°C (38°F to 95°F)

Humidity Operating: 20 to 80% (without condensation)

Storage: 20 to 80% (without condensation)

Dimensions (W x H x D) 500 x 388 x 490 mm (19.5 x 15.3 x 19.3 inches)

500 x 488 x 490 mm (19.5 x 19.2 x 19.1 inches)

with an optional lower tray unit fitted

Weight Approx. 32 kg (70.5 lbs.)

Approx. 36 kg (79.4 lbs.) with optional lower tray

unit and toner cartridge fitted .

USER’S GUIDE

A-4

PAPER SPECIFICATIONS

Paper Input Media Trays :

• Standard upper tray (Tray 1)

• Optional lower tray (Tray 2)

• Paper size:

TRAY 1: Letter, A4, ISO B5, JIS B5, Executive,

COM10 and DL

TRAY 2: Letter, A4, ISO B5, JIS B5, Executive

(Legal for Optional Legal Cassette)

• Max. stacking height in the cassette = 27 mm(1.06”)

• Max. paper cassette capacity = Approx. 250 sheets

of 75g/m2 (20 lbs)

Printed Output Face down print delivery

Paper Type Standard upper tray (Tray 1) :

• Plain paper of letter, A4, ISO B5, JIS B5 and

Executive sizes

100 x 210 mm to 216 x 297 mm

(3.9 x 8.2” to 8.5 x 11.7”)

[60 to 160 g/m2 (16 to 43 lbs)]

• Envelopes of COM10 and DL sizes

• Transparencies

• label stocks

Optional lower tray (Tray 2) :

• Plain paper of letter, A4, ISO B5, JIS B5 and

Executive sizes

100 x 210 mm to 216 x 297 mm

(3.9 x 8.2” to 8.5 x 11.7”)

[60 to 160 g/m2 (16 to 43 lbs)]

• Transparencies

• label stocks

Optional legal tray (Tray 1/2) :

• Plain paper of letter, legal, A4, ISO B5, JIS B5 and

Executive sizes

100 x 210 mm to 216 x 356 mm

(3.9 x 8.2” to 8.5 x 14”)

[60 to 160 g/m2 (16 to 43 lbs)]

• Envelopes of COM10 and DL sizes (Tray 1)

• Transparencies

• label stocks

APPENDICES

A-5

Test printing on paper, especially envelopes, is

recommended before making a large purchase. The

following types of envelopes are not recommended for

use.

• Envelopes with thick and/or crooked edges

• Damaged, curled, wrinkled, or irregularly shaped

envelopes

• Extremely shiny or highly textured envelopes

• Envelopes with clasps

• Envelopes of baggy construction

• Envelopes not sharply creased

• Embossed envelopes

• Envelopes already printed with a laser printer

• Envelopes that cannot be arranged uniformly when

placed in a pile

✒ Notes

An area 15 mm (0.6”) from the edges of the envelope will not be

printed.

Avoid feeding labels with the carrier sheet exposed. Otherwise, your

printer will be damaged.

When feeding OHP film, the use of a recommended type for laser

printers will ensure optimum printing. For detailed information on the

specification or purchase, please contact your nearest authorized sales

representative or the place of purchase.

■ PAPER

The printer is designed to work well with most types of xerographic and

bond paper. However, some paper variables may have an effect on print

quality or handling reliability. Always test samples of paper before

buying to ensure that it provides desirable performance. Some important

guidelines when selecting paper are:

1. Supplier should be informed that the paper or envelopes will be used

in a laser printer.

2. Preprinted papers must use inks that can withstand the temperature of

the printers fusing process. (200 degrees centigrade)

3. If selecting a cotton bond paper, paper having a rough surface such as

cockle or laid finished paper, or paper that is wrinkled or puckered

may exhibit degraded performance.

USER’S GUIDE

A-6

✒ Note

The manufacturer does not warrant the use of any particular paper. The

operator is responsible for the quality of paper used with the printer.

Paper Types to Avoid

Some types of paper might not perform well or may cause damage to

your printer.

Types of paper to avoid are:

1. Highly textured paper.

2. Smooth or shiny paper.

3. Paper that is coated or has a chemical finish.

4. Damaged, wrinkled or prefolded paper.

5. Paper exceeding the recommend weight specification specified in the

manual.

6. Paper with tabs and staples.

7. Letterheads using low temperature dyes or thermography.

8. Multipart or carbonless paper.

DAMAGE OR OTHER DEFECTS CAUSED BY THE USE OF

PAPERS LISTED UNDER “PAPER TYPES TO AVOID” WILL

NOT BE COVERED UNDER ANY WARRANTY OR SERVICE

AGREEMENTS.

■ ENVELOPES

Most envelopes will perform acceptably on your printer. However; some

envelopes will have feeding and print quality problems because of their

construction. A suitable envelope should have edges with a straight, well

creased folds and should not have more than two thickness of paper along

the lead edge. The envelope should lie flat and not have baggy or flimsy

construction. Purchase quality envelopes only from a supplier who

understands that the envelopes will be used in a laser printer. All

envelopes should be tested prior to use to ensure desirable print results.

Envelope Types to Avoid

1. Envelopes constructed with a paper with a weight that exceeds the

paper weight specifications for the printer.

2. Poorly manufactured envelopes with edges that are not straight or

consistently square.

3. Envelopes with “baggy” construction or folds that are not sharply

creased.

4. Envelopes with transparent windows, holes, cutouts or perforations.

APPENDICES

A-7

5. Envelopes with clasps, snaps or tie strings.

6. Envelopes made with smooth or shiny paper.

7. Envelopes that are rough, highly textured, or deeply embossed.

8. Envelopes which do not lie flat or that are curled, wrinkled, or

irregularly shaped.

9. Envelopes having an open flap with an adhesive that seals the

envelope.

USE OF ANY OF THE ENVELOPES LISTED ABOVE MAY

CAUSE DAMAGE TO YOUR PRINTER. SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT

COVERED UNDER ANY WARRANTY OR SERVICE

AGREEMENT.

✒ Note

The manufacturer neither warrants nor recommends the use of a

particular envelope because envelope properties are subject to change by

the envelope manufacturer. The entire responsibility for the quality and

performance of the envelope lies with the customer.

■ LABELS AND OVERHEAD TRANSPARENCIES

The printer will print on most type of labels and transparencies designed

for use with a laser printer. Labels should have an adhesive that is acrylic-

based since such material is more stable at the high temperatures in the

fusing unit. Adhesives should not come in contact with any part of the

printer, because the label stock may stick to the drum or rollers and cause

jams and print quality problems. No adhesive should be exposed between

the labels. Labels should be arranged so that they cover the entire page

with the only exposed spaces being lengthwise down the sheet. Using

labels with spaces may result in labels peeling off and causing serious jam

or print problems.

All labels and transparencies used in this printer must be able to withstand

a temperature of 200 degrees centigrade (392 degrees Fahrenheit) for a

period of 0.1 seconds.

Label and transparency sheets should not exceed the paper weight

specifications described in the User’s Guide. Labels and transparencies

exceeding this specification may not feed or print properly and cause

damage to your printer.

The entire responsibility for the quality and performance of labels and

transparencies lies with the customer.

DAMAGE CAUSED BY THE USE OF UNSATISFACTORY

LABELS OR TRANSPARENCIES IS NOT COVERED UNDER

ANY WARRANTY OR SERVICE AGREEMENTS.

USER’S GUIDE

A-8

INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS

Bi-directional Parallel Interface

Interface Connector

A shielded cable that is IEEE 1284 compliant with the following pin

assignment should be used. Most existing parallel cables support bi-

directional communication, but some might have incompatible pin

assignments or may not be IEEE 1284 compliant.

18 15 12 9 6 3 1

36 33 30 27 24 21 19

Fig. A-1 Parallel Interface Connector

Pin Assignment

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal

1 DATA STROBE 19 Twisted pair ground

2 DATA 0 20 Twisted pair ground

3 DATA 1 21 Twisted pair ground

4 DATA 2 22 Twisted pair ground

5 DATA 3 23 Twisted pair ground

6 DATA 4 24 Twisted pair ground

7 DATA 5 25 Twisted pair ground

8 DATA 6 26 Twisted pair ground

9 DATA 7 27 Twisted pair ground

10 ACKNLG 28 Twisted pair ground

11 BUSY 29 Twisted pair ground

12 PE 30 INPUT PRIME RET

13 SLCT 31 INPUT PRIME

14 AUTO FEED 32 FAULT

15 N.C. 33 N.C.

16 0V 34 N.C.

17 0V 35 N.C.

18 +5V 36 SELECT IN

APPENDICES

A-9

Signal Description

Pin No. Signal Name IN/OUT Explanation

1 DATA STROBE IN Data is latched at the leading edge of this

signal.

2 - 9 DATA 0 - 7 IN Parallel 8 bit data

10 ACKNLG OUT Data reception is completed and the printer is

ready for the next data reception when this

signal becomes low.

11 BUSY OUT The printer cannot receive data when this

signal is high. The signal becomes high under

data receiving, off-line, or error states.

12 PE OUT This signal becomes high when a paper

empty state is detected.

13 SLCT OUT This signal becomes high when the printer is

selected and low when it is deselected.

14 AUTO FEED IN This signal is used only for the bi-directional

interface.

31 INPUT PRIME IN This signal is used only for the bi-directional

interface.

32 FAULT OUT This signal becomes low when the printer is

in the paper empty, off-line, or error states.

36 SLCT IN IN This signal is used only for the bi-directional

interface.

USER’S GUIDE

A-10

Parallel Cable Connection for IBM-PC/AT or Compatible

Computers and IBM-PS/2 Computers

Signal Printer Pin No. Computer Pin No.

DATA STROBE 11

DATA 0 2 2

DATA 1 3 3

DATA 2 4 4

DATA 3 5 5

DATA 4 6 6

DATA 5 7 7

DATA 6 8 8

DATA 7 9 9

ACKNLG 10 10

BUSY 11 11

PE 12 12

SLCT 13 13

AUTO FEED 14 14

GND 19 - 30 18 - 25

FAULT 32 15

SLCT IN 36 17

APPENDICES

A-11

RS-232C Serial Interface

Standard Specifications

1) Baud rate: 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,

19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 baud

2) Synchronization: Start-stop

3) Communications control: No protocol

4) Data length: Serial 7 bits or 8 bits

5) Parity: Odd, even, or none

6) Stop bit: 1 or 2 stop bits

7) Protocol: Xon/Xoff or DTR

Interface Connectors

A shielded cable should be used.

13 10 7 4 1

25 21 18 14

Fig. A-2 Serial Interface Connector

Pin Assignment

No.

Signal IN/OUT

Printer Controller

No.

Signal IN/OUT

Printer Controller

1FG 14 NC

2SD 15 NC

3RD 16 NC

4RS 17 NC

5NC 18NC

6DR 19 NC

7SG 20 ER

8NC 21NC

9NC 22NC

10 NC 23 NC

11 NC 24 NC

12 NC 25 NC

13 NC

USER’S GUIDE

A-12

Signal Description

Signal Name IN/OUT Explanation

FG – Frame Ground

SD OUT Send Data.

RD IN Receive Data. Receives data transmitted from the

computer.

RS OUT Request To Send. “SPACE” level when the

printer is ready to send data to the computer.

DR IN Data Set Ready. When DSR is at “SPACE”

level, data can be accepted.

SG – Signal Ground

ER OUT Data Terminal Ready. “MARK” level when the

printer is Busy.

APPENDICES

A-13

Serial Cable Connection for IBM-PC/AT or Compatible

Computers and IBM-PS/2 Computers

The following diagrams show the pin connections for the most common

serial communications.

■ DB-9 Serial Connection

When you use a computer with a 9-pin serial port, use a cable with the

following pin configurations.

Printer (Male) Computer (Female)

SD 2 2RD

RD 3 3SD

DR (DSR) 6 4ER (DTR)

SG 7 5SG

ER (DTR) 20 6

8DR (DSR)

CS (CTS)

■ DB-25 Serial Connection

When you use a computer with a 25-pin serial port, use a cable with the

following pin configurations.

Printer (Male) Computer (Female)

FG 1 1FG

SD 2 3RD

RD 3 2SD

DR (DSR) 6 20 ER (DTR)

SG 7 7SG

ER (DTR) 20 5

6CS (CTS)

DR (DSR)

✒ Note

Any pins not shown in the figures above are not connected.

USER’S GUIDE

A-14

SYMBOL/CHARACTER SETS

You can select the symbol and character sets with the FONT switch in the

HP LaserJet, EPSON FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL emulation modes.

See “FONT Switch” in Chapter 4.

When you have selected the HP-GL emulation mode, you can select the

standard or alternate character set with the MODE switch. See

“GRAPHICS MODE” in Chapter 4.

OCR Symbol Sets

When the OCR-A or OCR-B font is selected, the corresponding symbol

set is always used.

OCR-A

OCR-B

APPENDICES

A-15

HP PCL Mode

Roman 8 (8U)

ISO Latin1 (0N)

ISO Latin2 (2N)

ISO Latin5 (5N)

USER’S GUIDE

A-16

PC-8 (10U)

PC-8 D/N (11U)

PC-850 (12U)

PC-852 (17U)

APPENDICES

A-17

PC-8 Turkish (9T)

Windows Latin1 (19U)

Windows Latin2 (9E)

Windows Latin5 (5T)

USER’S GUIDE

A-18

Legal (1U)

Ventura Math (6M)

Ventura Intl (13J)

Ventura US (14J)

APPENDICES

A-19

PS Math (5M)

PS Text (10J)

Math-8 (8M)

Pi Font (15U)

USER’S GUIDE

A-20

MS Publishing (6J)

Windows 3.0 (9U)

Desktop (7J)

MC Text (12J)

APPENDICES

A-21

Symbol (19M)

Windings (579L)

The following table shows characters available only in the corresponding

character set. The numbers at the top of the table are hexadecimal code

values with which characters are to be replaced in the Roman 8 character

set. For other characters, see the Roman 8 character set.

SYMBOL SET 23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E

ISO 2 IRV

ISO 4 UK

ISO 6 ASCII

ISO10 SWE/FIN

ISO11 Swedish

ISO14 JISASCII

ISO15 Italian

ISO16 POR

ISO17 Spanish

ISO21 German

ISO25 French

ISO57 Chinese

ISO60 NOR v1

ISO61 NOR v2

ISO69 French

ISO84 POR

ISO85 Spanish

HP German

HP Spanish

USER’S GUIDE

A-22

EPSON Mode

US ASCII

The following table shows characters available only in the corresponding

character set. The numbers at the top of the table are hexadecimal code

values with which characters are to be replaced in the US ASCII character

set. For other characters, see the US ASCII character set.

CHARACTER SET 23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E

German

UK ASCII I

French I

Danish I

Italy

Spanish

Swedish

Japanese

Norwegian

Danish II

UK ASCII II

French II

Dutch

South African

APPENDICES

A-23

PC-8

PC-8 D/N

PC-850

PC-852

USER’S GUIDE

A-24

PC-860

PC-863

PC-865

PC-8 Turkish

APPENDICES

A-25

IBM Mode

PC-8

PC-8 D/N

PC-850

PC-852

USER’S GUIDE

A-26

PC-860

PC-863

PC-865

PC-8 Turkish

APPENDICES

A-27

HP-GL Mode

ANSI ASCII

9825 CHR. SET

USER’S GUIDE

A-28

FRENCH/GERMAN

SCANDINAVIAN

SPANISH/LATIN

JIS ASCII

APPENDICES

A-29

ROMAN8 EXT.

ISO IRV

ISO SWEDISH

ISO SWEDISH:N

USER’S GUIDE

A-30

ISO NORWAY 1

ISO GERMAN

ISO FRENCH

ISO U.K.

APPENDICES

A-31

ISO ITALIAN

ISO SPANISH

ISO PORTUGUESE

ISO NORWAY 2

USER’S GUIDE

A-32

Symbol Sets Supported by the Printer’s Intellifont Compatible

Typefaces

PCL Symbol Set Typeface

Alaska Antique Brougham Cleveland Connect- Guatemala Letter

Set ID Symbol Set Oakland Cond. icut Antique Gothic

8URoman-8 •••••••

0N ISO 8859-1 Latin1 • • • • • • •

2N ISO 8859-2 Latin2 • • • • • • •

5N ISO 8859-9 Latin5 • • • • • • •

6N ISO 8859-10 Latin6 • • • • • • •

10U PC-8 • • • • • • •

11UPC-8 D/N •••••••

12U PC-850 • • • • • • •

17U PC-852 • • • • • • •

26U PC-775 • • • • • • •

9TPC-Turk •••••••

19U Windows 3.1 Latin1 • • • • • • •

9E Windows 3.1 Latin2 • • • • • • •

5T Windows 3.1 Latin5 • • • • • • •

7JDeskTop •••••••

9J PC-1004 (OS/2) • • • • • • •

10J PS Text • • • • • • •

13J Ventura International • • • • • • •

14J Ventura US • • • • • • •

6J Microsoft Publishing • • • • • • •

8M Math-8 • • • • • • •

5M PS Math • • • • • • •

6M Ventura Math • • • • • • •

15U PI Font • • • • • • •

1ULegal •••••••

1E ISO 4: United Kingdom* • • • • • • •

0U ISO 6: ASCII* • • • • • • •

2U ISO 2: IRV* • • • • • • •

0S ISO 11: Swedish: names* • • • • • • •

0I ISO 15: Italian* • • • • • • •

1S HP Spanish* • • • • • • •

2S ISO 17: Spanish* • • • • • • •

3S ISO 10: Swedish* • • • • • • •

4S ISO 16: Portuguese* • • • • • • •

5S ISO 84: Portuguese* • • • • • • •

6S ISO 85: Spanish* • • • • • • •

0G HP German* • • • • • • •

1G ISO 21: German* • • • • • • •

0D ISO 60: Norwegian 1* • • • • • • •

1D ISO 61: Norwegian 2* • • • • • • •

0F ISO 25: French* • • • • • • •

1F ISO 69: French* • • • • • • •

0K ISO 14: JIS ASCII* • • • • • • •

2K ISO 57: Chinese* • • • • • • •

9U Windows 3.0 Latin1 • • • • • • •

12J MC Text • • • • • • •

19M Symbol

19L Windows Baltic • • • • • • •

579L Wingdings

*These symbol sets are variations of the Roman-8 symbol set.

APPENDICES

A-33

PCL Symbol Set Typeface(Continued)

LetterGothic Mary- Oklahoma PC PC Utah Utah

Set ID Symbol Set 16.66** land Brussels Tennessee Cond.

8U Roman-8 • • • • • • •

0N ISO 8859-1 Latin1 • • • • • • •

2N ISO 8859-2 Latin2 • • • • • • •

5N ISO 8859-9 Latin5 • • • • • • •

6N ISO 8859-10 Latin6 • • • • • •

10UPC-8 • • •• •••

11U PC-8 D/N • • • • • • •

12UPC-850 • • •• •••

17U PC-852 • • • • • •

26U PC-775 • • • • •

9TPC-Turk • •• •••

19U Windows 3.1 Latin1 • • • • • •

9E Windows 3.1 Latin2 • • • • • •

5T Windows 3.1 Latin5 • • • • • •

7JDeskTop • •• •••

9J PC-1004(OS/2) • • • • •

10J PS Text • • • • • •

13J Ventura International • • • • • •

14J Ventura US • • • • • •

6J Microsoft Publishing • • • • • •

8M Math-8 • •

5M PS Math • •

6M Ventura Math • •

15U PI Font • •

1U Legal • • • • • • •

1E ISO 4: United Kingdom* • • • • • • •

0U ISO 6: ASCII* • • • • • • •

2U ISO 2: IRV* • • • • • • •

0S ISO 11: Swedish: names* • • • • • • •

0I ISO 15: Italian* • • • • • • •

1SHP Spanish* • • •• •••

2S ISO 17: Spanish* • • • • • • •

3S ISO 10: Swedish* • • • • • • •

4S ISO 16: Portuguese* • • • • • • •

5S ISO 84: Portuguese* • • • • • • •

6S ISO 85: Spanish* • • • • • • •

0G HP German* • • • • • • •

1G ISO 21: German* • • • • • • •

0D ISO 60: Norwegian 1* • • • • • • •

1D ISO 61: Norwegian 2* • • • • • • •

0F ISO 25: French* • • • • • • •

1F ISO 69: French* • • • • • • •

0K ISO 14: JIS ASCII* • • • • • • •

2K ISO 57: Chinese* • • • • • • •

9U Windows 3.0 Latin1 • • • • • •

12J MC Text • • • • • •

19M Symbol

19L Windows Baltic • • • • •

579L Wingdings

*These symbol sets are variations of the Roman-8 symbol set.

**LetterGothic 16.66 is a bitmapped font.

USER’S GUIDE

A-34

Symbol Sets Supported by the Printer’s TrueType™ and Type 1

Font Compatible, and Original Typefaces

PCL Symbol Set Typeface

Atlanta BR Copen- Calgary Helsinki Portugal Tennes- W

Set ID Symbol Set Symbol hagen see Dingbats

8U Roman-8 • • • • • •

0N ISO 8859-1 Latin1 • • • • • •

2N ISO 8859-2 Latin2 • •

5N ISO 8859-9 Latin5 • •

6N ISO 8859-10 Latin6 • •

10U PC-8 • • • • • •

11U PC-8 D/N • • • • • •

12U PC-850 • • • • • •

17U PC-852 • •

26U PC-775 • •

9T PC-Turk • •

19U Windows 3.1 Latin1 • • • • • •

9E Windows 3.1 Latin2 • •

5T Windows 3.1 Latin5 • •

7J DeskTop • • • • • •

9J PC-1004 (OS/2) • •

10J PS Text • • • • • •

13J Ventura International • • • • • •

14J Ventura US • • • • • •

6J Microsoft Publishing • • • • • •

8M Math-8 • •

5M PS Math • •

6M Ventura Math • •

15U PI Font • •

1U Legal • • • • • •

1E ISO 4: United Kingdom* • • • • • •

0U ISO 6: ASCII* • • • • • •

2U ISO 2: IRV* • • • • • •

0S ISO 11: Swedish: names* • • • • • •

0I ISO 15: Italian* • • • • • •

1S HP Spanish* • • • • • •

2S ISO 17: Spanish* • • • • • •

3S ISO 10: Swedish* • • • • • •

4S ISO 16: Portuguese* • • • • • •

5S ISO 84: Portuguese* • • • • • •

6S ISO 85: Spanish* • • • • • •

0G HP German* • • • • • •

1G ISO 21: German* • • • • • •

0D ISO 60: Norwegian 1* • • • • • •

1D ISO 61: Norwegian 2* • • • • • •

0F ISO 25: French* • • • • • •

1F ISO 69: French* • • • • • •

0K ISO 14: JIS ASCII* • • • • • •

2K ISO 57: Chinese* • • • • • •

9U Windows 3.0 Latin1 • • • • • •

12J MC Text • • • • • •

19M Symbol •

19L Windows Baltic • •

579L Wingdings •

*These symbol sets are variations of the Roman-8 symbol set.

APPENDICES

A-35

PCL Symbol Set Typeface

Bermuda Script Germany San Diego US Roman

Set ID Symbol Set

8U Roman-8 • • • •

0N ISO 8859-1 Latin1 • • • •

2N ISO 8859-2 Latin2

5N ISO 8859-9 Latin5

6N ISO 8859-10 Latin6

10U PC-8 • • • •

11U PC-8 D/N • • • •

12U PC-850 • • • •

17U PC-852

26U PC-775

9T PC-Turk

19U Windows 3.1 Latin1 • • • •

9E Windows 3.1 Latin2

5T Windows 3.1 Latin5

7J DeskTop • • • •

9J PC-1004 (OS/2)

10J PS Text • • • •

13J Ventura International • • • •

14J Ventura US • • • •

6J Microsoft Publishing • • • •

8M Math-8

5M PS Math

6M Ventura Math

15U PI Font

1U Legal • • • •

1E ISO 4: United Kingdom* • • • •

0U ISO 6: ASCII* • • • •

2U ISO 2: IRV* • • • •

0S ISO 11: Swedish: names* • • • •

0I ISO 15: Italian* • • • •

1S HP Spanish* • • • •

2S ISO 17: Spanish* • • • •

3S ISO 10: Swedish* • • • •

4S ISO 16: Portuguese* • • • •

5S ISO 84: Portuguese* • • • •

6S ISO 85: Spanish* • • • •

0G HP German* • • • •

1G ISO 21: German* • • • •

0D ISO 60: Norwegian 1* • • • •

1D ISO 61: Norwegian 2* • • • •

0F ISO 25: French* • • • •

1F ISO 69: French* • • • •

0K ISO 14: JIS ASCII* • • • •

2K ISO 57: Chinese* • • • •

9U Windows 3.0 Latin1 • • • •

12J MC Text • • • •

19M Symbol

19L Windows Baltic

579L Wingdings

*These symbol sets are variations of the Roman-8 symbol set.

USER’S GUIDE

A-36

QUICK REFERENCE OF COMMANDS

The following tables show commands sorted by function. For further

information about commands, refer to the “Technical Reference Manual,”

which is optionally available.

✒ Note

l represents the lowercase l letter. Script notation is used because

lowercase l and the number 1 can be easily confused with each other.

HP PCL Mode

PCL Command Sets

Function Command Decimal Hexadecimal

CONTROL CODE

Backspace BS 08 08

Horizontal Tab HT 09 09

Line Feed LF 10 0A

Form Feed FF 12 0C

Carriage Return CR 13 0D

Secondary Font Select SO 14 0E

Primary font Select SI 15 0F

Escape ESC 27 1B

PAGE FORMAT

Page Length ESC & l # P 27 38 108 ## 80 1B 26 6C ## 50

(# lines)

Top Margin ESC & l # E 27 38 108 ## 69 1B 26 6C ## 45

(# lines)

Text Length ESC & l # F 27 38 108 ## 70 1B 26 6C ## 46

(# lines)

Left Margin ESC & a # L 27 38 97 ## 76 1B 26 61 ## 4C

(# column)

Right Margin ESC & a # M 27 38 97 ## 77 1B 26 61 ## 4D

(# column)

Clear Side Margin ESC 9 27 57 1B 39

Line Pitch ESC & l # C 27 38 108 ## 67 1B 26 6C ## 43

(# /48 inch)

Line Spacing ESC & l # D 27 38 108 ## 68 1B 26 6C ## 44

1 line/inch ESC & l 1 D 27 38 108 49 68 1B 26 6C 31 44

2 lines/inch ESC & l 2 D 27 38 108 50 68 1B 26 6C 32 44

3 lines/inch ESC & l 3 D 27 38 108 51 68 1B 26 6C 33 44

4 lines/inch ESC & l 4 D 27 38 108 52 68 1B 26 6C 34 44

6 lines/inch ESC & l 6 D 27 38 108 54 68 1B 26 6C 36 44

8 lines/inch ESC & l 8 D 27 38 108 56 68 1B 26 6C 38 44

12 lines/inch ESC & l 12 D 27 38 108 49 50 68 1B 26 6C 31 32 44

16 lines/inch ESC & l 16 D 27 38 108 49 54 68 1B 26 6C 31 36 44

24 lines/inch ESC & l 24 D 27 38 108 50 52 68 1B 26 6C 32 34 44

48 lines/inch ESC & l 48 D 27 38 108 52 56 68 1B 26 6C 34 38 44

Character Pitch ESC & k # H 27 38 107 ## 72 1B 26 6B ## 48

(# /120 inch)

ex. 10 pitch ESC & k 12 H 27 38 107 49 50 72 1B 26 6B 31 32 48

APPENDICES

A-37

Function Command Decimal Hexadecimal

Paper Size ESC & l # A 27 38 108 ## 65 1B 26 6C ## 41

Executive ESC & l 1 A 27 38 108 49 65 1B 26 6C 31 41

Letter ESC & l 2 A 27 38 108 50 65 1B 26 6C 32 41

Legal ESC & l 3 A 27 38 108 51 65 1B 26 6C 33 41

A4 ESC & l 26 A 27 38 108 50 54 65 1B 26 6C 32 36 41

B5 ESC & l 100 A 27 38 108 49 48 48 65 1B 26 6C 31 30 30 41

B6 ESC & l 1024 A 27 38 108 49 48 50 52 65 1B 26 6C 31 30 32 34 41

A5 ESC & l 1025 A 27 38 108 49 48 50 53 65 1B 26 6C 31 30 32 35 41

A6 ESC & l 1026 A 27 38 108 49 48 50 54 65 1B 26 6C 31 30 32 36 41

Envelopes

Monarch ESC & l 80 A 27 38 108 56 48 65 1B 26 6C 38 30 41

COM 10 ESC & l 81 A 27 38 108 56 49 65 1B 26 6C 38 31 41

DL ESC & l 90 A 27 38 108 57 48 65 1B 26 6C 39 30 41

C5 ESC & l 91 A 27 38 108 57 49 65 1B 26 6C 39 31 41

CURSOR POSITIONING

Horizontal Position ESC & a # C 27 38 97 ## 67 1B 26 61 ## 43

(# column)

Horizontal Position ESC & a # H 27 38 97 ## 72 1B 26 61 ## 48

(# decipoint)

Horizontal Position ESC * p # X 27 42 112 ## 88 1B 2A 70 ## 58

(# dot)

Vertical Position ESC & a # R 27 38 97 ## 82 1B 26 61 ## 52

(# line)

Vertical Position ESC & a # V 27 38 97 ## 86 1B 26 61 ## 56

(# decipoint)

Vertical Position ESC * p # Y 27 42 112 ## 89 1B 2A 70 ## 59

(# dot)

VECTOR GRAPHICS

Enter HP-GL/2 Mode

Use Previous HP-GL/2 ESC % 0 B 27 37 48 66 1B 25 30 42

Pen Position

Use Current PCL CAP ESC % 1 B 27 37 49 66 1B 25 31 42

Use Current PCL dot coordinate ESC % 2 B 27 37 50 66 1B 25 32 42

System and old HP-GL/2 Pen

Position

Use Current PCL dot coordinate ESC % 3 B 27 37 51 66 1B 25 33 42

System and the current PCL

cursor Position

HP-GL/2 Plot Horizontal Size ESC * c # K 27 42 99 # … # 75 1B 2A 63 # … # 4B

(# inch)

HP-GL/2 Plot Vertical Size ESC * c # L 27 42 99 # … # 76 1B 2A 63 # … # 4C

(# inch)

Set Picture Frame Anchor Point ESC * c 0 T 27 42 99 48 84 1B 2A 63 50 54

Picture Frame Horizontal Size ESC * c # X 27 42 99 # … # 88 1B 2A 63 # … # 58

(# decipoint)

Picture Frame Vertical Size ESC * c # Y 27 42 99 # … # 89 1B 2A 63 # … # 59

(# decipoint)

USER’S GUIDE

A-38

Function Command Decimal Hexadecimal

RASTER GRAPHICS

Resolution Setting

75 dpi ESC * t 75 R 27 42 116 55 53 82 1B 2A 74 37 35 52

100 dpi ESC * t 100 R 27 42 116 49 48 48 82 1B 2A 74 31 30 30 52

200 dpi ESC * t 200 R 27 42 116 50 48 48 82 1B 2A 74 32 30 30 52

150 dpi ESC * t 150 R 27 42 116 49 53 48 82 1B 2A 74 31 35 30 52

300 dpi ESC * t 300 R 27 42 116 51 48 48 82 1B 2A 74 33 30 30 52

600 dpi ESC * t 600 R 27 42 116 54 48 48 82 1B 2A 74 36 30 30 52

Raster Graphics Presentation

Orientation Oriented ESC * r 0 F 27 42 114 48 70 1B 2A 72 30 46

Raster Oriented ESC * r 3 F 27 42 114 51 70 1B 2A 72 33 46

Begin Raster Graphics

Left-most Position ESC * r 0 A 27 42 114 48 65 1B 2A 72 30 41

Current Position ESC * r 1 A 27 42 114 49 65 1B 2A 72 31 41

Turn on scale mode (Logical left) ESC * r 2 A 27 42 114 50 65 1B 2A 72 32 41

Turn on scale mode (Current position) ESC * r 3 A 27 42 114 51 65 1B 2A 72 33 41

Transfer Raster Data ESC * b # W [data] 27 42 98 ## 87 1B 2A 62 ## 57

(# byte)

Transfer Raster Data by Plane ESC * b # V [data] 27 42 98 ## 86 1B 2A 62 ## 56

(Expanded for PCL5C color data) (# byte)

Set Compression Mode

Uncoded ESC * b 0 M 27 42 98 48 77 1B 2A 62 30 4D

Run-Length Encoded ESC * b 1 M 27 42 98 49 77 1B 2A 62 31 4D

Tagged Image File Format ESC * b 2 M 27 42 98 50 77 1B 2A 62 32 4D

Delta Row ESC * b 3 M 27 42 98 51 77 1B 2A 62 33 4D

Mode 5 ESC * b 5 M 27 42 98 53 77 1B 2A 62 35 4D

Mode 9 ESC * b 9 M 27 42 98 57 77 1B 2A 62 39 4D

CCITT G3/G4 (original) ESC * b 1152 M 27 42 98 49 49 53 50 77 1B 2A 62 31 31 35 32 4D

TIFF (for 600 dpi only, original) ESC * b 1024 M 27 42 98 49 48 50 52 77 1B 2A 62 31 30 32 34 4D

1200 dpi Image Format ESC * b 1027 M 27 42 98 49 48 50 55 77 1B 2A 62 31 30 32 37 4D

(for 1200 dpi only, original)

Compress Transfer ESC * b # C [data] 27 42 98 ## 67 1B 2A 62 ## 43

(# byte)

Raster Y Offset ESC * b # Y 27 42 98 ## 89 1B 2A 62 ## 59

(# Line)

Raster Height ESC * r # T 27 42 114 ## 84 1B 2A 72 ## 54

(# Row)

Raster Width ESC * r # S 27 42 114 ## 83 1B 2A 72 ## 53

(# Pixel)

Destination Raster Width ESC * r # H 27 42 114 ## 72 1B 2A 72 ## 48

(# Pixel in decipoint)

Destination Raster Height ESC * r # V 27 42 114 ## 86 1B 2A 72 ## 56

(# Pixel in decipoint

Scale Algorithm

Light background ESC * r 0 K 27 42 114 48 75 1B 2A 72 30 4B

Dark background ESC * r 1 K 27 42 114 49 75 1B 2A 72 31 4B

End Raster Graphics ESC * r B 27 42 114 66 1B 2A 72 42

End Raster Graphics ESC * r C 27 42 114 67 1B 2A 72 43

COLOR COMMAND (Extended for PCL5C)

Simple Color

3Plane,device CMY pallete ESC * r -3 U 27 42 114 45 51 85 1B 2A 72 2D 33 55

Single Plane,Black and White pallete ESC * r 1 U 27 42 114 49 85 1B 2A 72 31 55

APPENDICES

A-39

3Plane,device RGB pallete ESC * r 3 U 27 42 114 51 85 1B 2A 72 33 55

Configure Image Data ESC * v # W [data] 27 42 118 ## 87 1B 2A 76 ## 57

(# byte)

Color Component One ESC * v # A 27 42 118 # 65 1B 2A 76 # 41

(# First Component)

Color Component Two ESC * v # B 27 42 118 # 66 1B 2A 76 # 42

(# Second Component)

Color Component Three ESC * v # C 27 42 118 # 67 1B 2A 76 # 43

(# Third Component)

Assign Color Index ESC * v # I 27 42 118 # 73 1B 2A 76 # 49

(# Index Number)

Push Palette ESC * p 0 P 27 42 112 48 80 1B 2A 70 30 50

Pop Palette ESC * p 1 P 27 42 112 49 80 1B 2A 70 31 50

Foreground Color ESC * v # S 27 42 118 ## 83 1B 2A 76 ## 53

(# Palette Index Number)

Render Algorithm

Continuous Tone (Device Best) ESC * t 0 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

Snap to primaries ESC * t 1 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

Snap Black to White and ESC * t 2 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

other color to black

Device best Dither ESC * t 3 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

Error Difusion ESC * t 4 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

Device best Dither (Monochrome) ESC * t 5 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

Error Difusion (Monochrome) ESC * t 6 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

Cluster Dither ESC * t 7 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

Cluster Dither (Monochrome) ESC * t 8 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

User defined Dither ESC * t 9 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

User defined Dither (Monochrome) ESC * t 10 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

Ordered Dither ESC * t 11 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

Ordered Dither (Monochrome) ESC * t 12 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

Noise Dither ESC * t 13 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

Noise Dither (Monochrome) ESC * t 14 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

Continuous Tone (Smooth 150dpi) ESC * t 15 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

Continuous Tone (Detail 300dpi) ESC * t 16 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

(Monochrome)

Continuous Tone (Smooth 150dpi) ESC * t 17 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

(Monochrome)

Continuous Tone (Basic 100dpi) ESC * t 18 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

Continuous Tone (Basic 100dpi) ESC * t 19 J 27 42 116 48 74 1B 2A 74 30 4A

(Monochrome)

Download Dither Matrix ESC * m # W [data] 27 42 109 48 74 1B 2A 6D 30 4A

(# byte)

Gamma Correction ESC * t # I 27 42 116 ## 73 1B 2A 74 ## 49

(# Gamma Number)

Monochrome Print Mode

Mixed render algorithm mode ESC & b 0 M 27 38 98 48 77 1B 26 62 30 4D

Gray equivalent mode ESC & b 1 M 27 38 98 49 77 1B 26 62 31 4D

Text Color ESC & v # S 27 38 118 ## 83 1B 26 76 ## 53

(# Color Number)

PRINT MODEL

Select Pattern

Solid Black (default) ESC * v 0 T 27 42 118 48 84 1B 2A 76 30 54

Solid White ESC * v 1 T 27 42 118 49 84 1B 2A 76 31 54

USER’S GUIDE

A-40

HP-defined Shading Pattern ESC * v 2 T 27 42 118 50 84 1B 2A 76 32 54

HP-defined Cross-Hatched ESC * v 3 T 27 42 118 51 84 1B 2A 76 33 54

Pattern

User defined ESC * v 4 T 27 42 118 52 84 1B 2A 76 34 54

Brother-defined Shading Pattern ESC * v 130 T 27 42 118 49 51 48 84 1B 2A 76 31 33 30 54

(64 steps, original)

Select Source Transparency Mode

Transparent ESC * v 0 N 27 42 118 48 78 1B 2A 76 30 42

Opaque ESC * v 1 N 27 42 118 49 78 1B 2A 76 31 42

Select Pattern Transparency Mode

Transparent ESC * v 0 O 27 42 118 48 79 1B 2A 76 30 43

Opaque ESC * v 1 O 27 42 118 49 79 1B 2A 76 31 43

APPENDICES

A-41

Function Command Decimal Hexadecimal

PATTERN

Horizontal Size ESC * c # A 27 42 99 ## 65 1B 2A 63 ## 41

(# dot)

Horizontal Size ESC * c # H 27 42 99 ## 72 1B 2A 63 ## 48

(# decipoint)

Vertical Size ESC * c # B 27 42 99 ## 66 1B 2A 63 ## 42

(# dot)

Vertical Size ESC * c # V 27 42 99 ## 86 1B 2A 63 ## 56

(# decipoint)

Pattern ID Setting ESC * c # G 27 42 99 ## 71 1B 2A 63 ## 71

(See note below.) (#: ID)

2% Gray ESC * c 2 G 27 42 99 50 71 1B 2A 63 32 47

10% Gray ESC * c 10 G 27 42 99 49 48 71 1B 2A 63 31 30 47

15 % Gray ESC * c 15 G 27 42 99 49 53 71 1B 2A 63 31 35 47

30% Gray ESC * c 30 G 27 42 99 51 48 71 1B 2A 63 33 30 47

45% Gray ESC * c 45 G 27 42 99 52 53 71 1B 2A 63 34 35 47

70% Gray ESC * c 70 G 27 42 99 55 48 71 1B 2A 63 37 30 47

90% Gray ESC * c 90 G 27 42 99 57 48 71 1B 2A 63 39 30 47

100% Gray ESC * c 100 G 27 42 99 49 48 48 71 1B 2A 63 31 30 30 47

✒ Note

These gray settings can be expressed in 64 shades with ESC * v 130T

and ESC * c 130 P.

USER’S GUIDE

A-42

Function Command Decimal Hexadecimal

1 Horiz. Line ESC * c 1 G 27 42 99 49 71 1B 2A 63 31 47

2 Vert. Lines ESC * c 2 G 27 42 99 50 71 1B 2A 63 32 47

3 Diagonal Lines ESC * c 3 G 27 42 99 51 71 1B 2A 63 33 47

4 Diagonal Lines ESC * c 4 G 27 42 99 52 71 1B 2A 63 34 47

5 Square Grid ESC * c 5 G 27 42 99 53 71 1B 2A 63 35 47

6 Diagonal Grid ESC * c 6 G 27 42 99 54 71 1B 2A 63 36 47

Print pattern

Solid Black ESC * c 0 P 27 42 99 48 80 1B 2A 63 30 50

Erase (Solid White Area Fill) ESC * c 1 P 27 42 99 49 80 1B 2A 63 31 50

Shaded Fill ESC * c 2 P 27 42 99 50 80 1B 2A 63 32 50

Cross-hatched Fill ESC * c 3 P 27 42 99 51 80 1B 2A 63 33 50

User defined ESC * c 4 P 27 42 99 52 80 1B 2A 63 34 50

Current Pattern ESC * c 5 P 27 42 99 53 80 1B 2A 63 35 50

Brother-defined Shading Fill ESC * c 130 P 27 42 99 49 51 48 80 1B 2A 63 31 33 30 50

(64 steps, original)

Define Pattern ESC * c # W 1B 2A 63 ## 51 27 42 99 ## 87

(#: byte)

User-defined Pattern Control

Delete All ESC * c 0 Q 1B 2A 63 30 51 27 42 99 48 81

Delete Temporary ESC * c 1 Q 1B 2A 63 31 51 27 42 99 49 81

Delete Current Pattern ESC * c 2 Q 1B 2A 63 32 51 27 42 99 50 81

Make Temporary ESC * c 4 Q 1B 2A 63 34 51 27 42 99 52 81

Make Permanent ESC * c 5 Q 1B 2A 63 35 51 27 42 99 53 81

Set Pattern Reference Point

Print Direction Oriented ESC * p 0 R 1B 2A 70 30 52 27 42 112 48 82

Logical Page Oriented ESC * p 1 R 1B 2A 70 31 52 27 42 112 49 82

APPENDICES

A-43

Function Command Decimal Hexadecimal

DOWNLOAD FONT

Font ID Set ESC * c # D 27 42 99 ## 68 1B 2A 63 ## 44

(#: ID)

Character Code Set ESC * c # E 27 42 99 ## 69 1B 2A 63 ## 45

(##: chara. code)

Download Control

Delete All ESC * c 0 F 27 42 99 48 70 1B 2A 63 30 46

Delete Temporary ESC * c 1 F 27 42 99 49 70 1B 2A 63 31 46

Delete Current ID ESC * c 2 F 27 42 99 50 70 1B 2A 63 32 46

Delete Current Character Code ESC * c 3 F 27 42 99 51 70 1B 2A 63 33 46

Make Temporary ESC * c 4 F 27 42 99 52 70 1B 2A 63 34 46

Make Permanent ESC * c 5 F 27 42 99 53 70 1B 2A 63 35 46

Copy Assign ESC * c 6 F 27 42 99 54 70 1B 2A 63 36 46

Download Font/Flash Memory Card (original)

Delete One from Card ESC * c 1026 F 27 42 99 49 48 50 54 70 1B 2A 63 31 30 32 36 46

Delete All from Card ESC * c 1028 F 27 42 99 49 48 50 56 70 1B 2A 63 31 30 32 38 46

Save Current Font into Card ESC * c 1029 F 27 42 99 49 48 50 57 70 1B 2A 63 31 30 32 39 46

Set to Primary Font ESC ( # X 27 40 ## 88 1B 28 ## 58

(#: font ID)

Set to Secondary Font ESC ) # X 27 41 ## 88 1B 29 ## 58

(#: font ID)

Font Default Setting

Primary ESC ( # @ 27 40 ## 64 1B 28 ## 40

(#: control)

Secondary ESC ) # @ 27 41 ## 64 1B 29 ## 40

(#: control)

Download Font Header ESC ) s # W 27 41 115 ## 87 1B 29 73 ## 57

(#: byte)

Download Character ESC ( s # W 27 40 115 ## 87 1B 28 73 ## 57

(#: byte)

USER’S GUIDE

A-44

Function Command Decimal Hexadecimal

USER-DEFINED SYMBOL SET

Symbol Set ID Set ESC * c # R 27 42 99 ## 82 1B 2A 63 ## 52

(#: ID)

Define Symbol Set ESC ( f # W 27 40 102 ## 87 1B 28 66 ## 46

(#: byte)

Symbol Set Control

Delete All ESC * c 0 S 27 42 99 48 83 1B 2A 63 30 53

Delete Temporary ESC * c 1 S 27 42 99 49 83 1B 2A 63 31 53

Delete Current ID ESC * c 2 S 27 42 99 50 83 1B 2A 63 32 53

Make Temporary ESC * c 4 S 27 42 99 52 83 1B 2A 63 34 53

Make Permanent ESC * c 5 S 27 42 99 53 83 1B 2A 63 35 53

MACRO

Macro ID Set ESC & f # Y 27 38 102 ## 89 1B 26 66 ## 59

(#: ID)

Macro Control

Start Macro Definition ESC & f 0 X 27 38 102 48 88 1B 26 66 30 58

End Macro Definition ESC & f 1 X 27 38 102 49 88 1B 26 66 31 58

Execute Macro ESC & f 2 X 27 38 102 50 88 1B 26 66 32 58

Call Macro ESC & f 3 X 27 38 102 51 88 1B 26 66 33 58

Macro Overlay ON ESC & f 4 X 27 38 102 52 88 1B 26 66 34 58

Macro Overlay OFF ESC & f 5 X 27 38 102 53 88 1B 26 66 35 58

Delete All Macros ESC & f 6 X 27 38 102 54 88 1B 26 66 36 58

Delete Temporary Macro ESC & f 7 X 27 38 102 55 88 1B 26 66 37 58

Delete Current Macro ESC & f 8 X 27 38 102 56 88 1B 26 66 38 58

Make Temporary Macro ESC & f 9 X 27 38 102 57 88 1B 26 66 39 58

Make Permanent Macro ESC & f 10 X 27 38 102 49 48 88 1B 26 66 31 30 58

Macro/Card (original)

Delete All Macros from Card ESC & f 1030 X 27 38 102 49 48 51 48 88 1B 26 66 31 30 33 30 58

Delete Current Macro ESC & f 1036 X 27 38 102 49 48 51 54 88 1B 26 66 31 30 33 36 58

from Card

Save Current Macro into Card ESC & f 1038 X 27 38 102 49 48 51 56 88 1B 26 66 31 30 33 38 58

STATUS READBACK

Set Status Readback Location Type

Invalid Location ESC * s 0 T 27 42 115 48 84 1B 2A 73 30 54

Currently Selected ESC * s 1 T 27 42 115 49 84 1B 2A 73 31 54

All Locations ESC * s 2 T 27 42 115 50 84 1B 2A 73 32 54

Internal ESC * s 3 T 27 42 115 51 84 1B 2A 73 33 54

Downloaded ESC * s 4 T 27 42 115 52 84 1B 2A 73 34 54

Cartridge ESC * s 5 T 27 42 115 53 84 1B 2A 73 35 54

Option ROM Socket ESC * s 7 T 27 42 115 55 84 1B 2A 73 37 54

Set Status Readback Location Unit

All Entities of Location Type ESC * s 0 U 27 42 115 48 85 1B 2A 73 30 55

Entity 1 or Temporary ESC * s 1 U 27 42 115 49 85 1B 2A 73 31 55

Entity 2 or Permanent ESC * s 2 U 27 42 115 50 85 1B 2A 73 32 55

Entity 3 ESC * s 3 U 27 42 115 51 85 1B 2A 73 33 55

Entity 4 ESC * s 4 U 27 42 115 52 85 1B 2A 73 34 55

Inquire Status Readback Entity

Font ESC * s 0 I 27 42 115 48 73 1B 2A 73 30 49

Macro ESC * s 1 I 27 42 115 49 73 1B 2A 73 31 49

User-defined Pattern ESC * s 2 I 27 42 115 50 73 1B 2A 73 32 49

Symbol Set ESC * s 3 I 27 42 115 51 73 1B 2A 73 33 49

Font Extended ESC * s 4 I 27 42 115 52 73 1B 2A 73 34 49

APPENDICES

A-45

Function Command Decimal Hexadecimal

Flush All Pages

Flush All Complete Pages ESC & r 0 F 27 38 114 48 70 1B 26 72 30 46

Flush All Page Data ESC & r 1 F 27 38 114 49 70 1B 26 72 31 46

Free Memory Space ESC * s 1 M 27 42 115 49 77 1B 2A 73 31 4D

Echo ESC * s # X 27 42 115 # … # 88 1B 2A 73 # … # 58

# = Echo value

(-32767 to 32767)

OTHER COMMANDS

Push Cursor Position ESC & f 0 S 27 38 102 48 83 1B 26 66 30 53

Pop Cursor Position ESC & f 1 S 27 38 102 49 83 1B 26 66 31 53

Display Function

ON ESC Y 27 89 1B 59

OFF ESC Z 27 90 1B 5A

Transparent Print ESC & p # X 27 38 112 ## 88 1B 26 70 ## 58

(# byte)

Perforation Skip

ON ESC & l 1 L 27 38 108 49 76 1B 26 6C 31 4C

OFF ESC & l 0 L 27 38 108 48 76 1B 26 6C 30 4C

End of Line Wrap

ON ESC & s 0 C 27 38 115 48 67 1B 26 73 30 43

OFF ESC & s 1 C 27 38 115 49 67 1B 26 73 31 43

Auto Underline

ON ESC & d # D 27 38 100 ## 68 1B 26 64 ## 44

Fix ESC & d 0 D 27 38 100 48 68 1B 26 64 30 44

Float ESC & d 3 D 27 38 100 51 68 1B 26 64 33 44

OFF ESC & d @ 27 38 100 64 1B 26 64 40

Half Line Feed ESC = 27 61 1B 3D

Line Termination

CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF ESC & k 0 G 27 38 107 48 71 1B 26 6B 30 47

CR=CR+LF, LF=LF, FF=FF ESC & k 1 G 27 38 107 49 71 1B 26 6B 31 47

CR=CR, LF=LF+CR, ESC & k 2 G 27 38 107 50 71 1B 26 6B 32 47

FF=FF+CR

CR=CR+LF, LF=LF+CR, ESC & k 3 G 27 38 107 51 71 1B 26 6B 33 47

FF=FF+CR

Print Orientation

Portrait ESC & l 0 O 27 38 108 48 79 1B 26 6C 30 4F

Landscape ESC & l 1 O 27 38 108 49 79 1B 26 6C 31 4F

Reverse Portrait ESC & l 2 O 27 38 108 50 79 1B 26 6C 32 4F

Reverse Landscape ESC & l 3 O 27 38 108 51 79 1B 26 6C 33 4F

Print Direction ESC & a # P 27 38 97 # … # 80 1B 26 61 # … # 50

(# degree)

Copy Volume ESC & l # X 27 38 108 ## 88 1B 26 6C ## 58

Paper Input Control

Paper Eject ESC & l 0 H 27 38 108 48 72 1B 26 6C 30 48

Feed From Upper Cassette ESC & l 1 H 27 38 108 49 72 1B 26 6C 31 48

(TRAY 1)

Manual Feed ESC & l 2 H 27 38 108 50 72 1B 26 6C 32 48

Envelope ESC & l 3 H 27 38 108 51 72 1B 26 6C 33 48

Feed From MP Tray ESC & l 4 H 27 38 108 52 72 1B 26 6C 34 48

Feed From Lower Cassette ESC & l 5 H 27 38 108 53 72 1B 26 6C 35 48

(TRAY 2 or Option)

USER’S GUIDE

A-46

Function Command Decimal Hexadecimal

Printer Reset ESC E 27 69 1B 45

Self-test ESC z 27 122 1B 7A

Job Separation ESC & l # T 27 38 108 ## 84 1B 26 6C ## 54

Unit of Measure ESC & u # D 27 38 117 # … # 68 1B 26 75 # … # 44

(# = Units/inch)

Go to Other Emulations (original)

BR-Script 2 Batch Mode ESC CR A B 27 13 65 66 1B 0D 41 42

BR-Script 2 Interactive Mode ESC CR A I 27 13 65 73 1B 0D 41 49

HP-GL ESC CR G L 27 13 71 76 1B 0D 47 4C

IBM Proprinter XL ESC CR I 27 13 73 1B 0D 49

EPSON FX-850 ESC CR E 27 13 69 1B 0D 45

High Resolution Control (HRC) (original)

Set HRC Off ESC CR R O 27 13 82 79 1B 0D 52 4F

Set HRC to Light Level ESC CR R L 27 13 82 76 1B 0D 52 4C

Set HRC to Medium Level ESC CR R M 27 13 82 77 1B 0D 52 4D

Set HRC to Dark Level ESC CR R D 27 13 82 68 1B 0D 52 44

User Reset (original)

Restore to User Settings ESC CR ! # R 27 13 33 # 82 1B 0D 21 # 52

# = 0 to 2

Factory Reset (original)

Restore to Factory Settings ESC CR F D 27 13 70 68 1B 0D 46 44

Execute Card Data (original)

Execute saved card data ESC CR ! # E 27 13 33 # 69 1B 0D 21 # 45

FONT SELECTION

Symbol Set

ISO 60: Norwegian 1 ESC ( 0 D 27 40 48 68 1B 28 30 44

ISO 61: Norwegian 2 ESC ( 1 D 27 40 49 68 1B 28 31 44

ISO 4: United Kingdom ESC ( 1 E 27 40 49 69 1B 28 31 45

Windows 3.1 Latin1 ESC ( 9 E 27 40 57 69 1B 28 39 45

ISO 25: French ESC ( 0 F 27 40 48 70 1B 28 30 46

ISO 69: French ESC ( 1 F 27 40 49 70 1B 28 31 46

HP German ESC ( 0 G 27 40 48 71 1B 28 30 47

ISO 21: German ESC ( 1 G 27 40 49 71 1B 28 31 47

ISO 15: Italian ESC ( 0 I 27 40 48 73 1B 28 30 49

Microsoft Publishing ESC ( 6 J 27 40 54 74 1B 28 36 4A

Desk Top ESC ( 7 J 27 40 55 74 1B 28 37 4A

PS Text ESC ( 10 J 27 40 49 48 74 1B 28 31 30 4A

MC Text ESC ( 12 J 27 40 49 50 74 1B 28 31 32 4A

Ventura International ESC ( 13 J 27 40 49 51 74 1B 28 31 33 4A

Ventura US ESC ( 14 J 27 40 49 52 74 1B 28 31 34 4A

ISO 14: JIS ASCII ESC ( 0 K 27 40 48 75 1B 28 30 4B

ISO 57: Chinese ESC ( 2 K 27 40 50 75 1B 28 32 4B

ISO 8859-1 (ECMA-94) Latin1 ESC ( 0 N 27 40 48 78 1B 28 30 4E

APPENDICES

A-47

Function Command Decimal Hexadecimal

Wingdings ESC ( 579 L 27 40 53 55 57 76 1B 28 35 37 39 4C

PS Math ESC ( 5 M 27 40 53 77 1B 28 35 4D

Ventura Math ESC ( 6 M 27 40 54 77 1B 28 36 4D

Math-8 ESC ( 8 M 27 40 56 77 1B 28 38 4D

Symbol ESC ( 19 M 27 40 49 57 77 1B 28 31 39 4D

ISO 8859-2 Latin2 ESC ( 2 N 27 40 50 78 1B 28 32 4E

ISO 8859-5 Latin5 ESC ( 5 N 27 40 53 78 1B 28 35 4E

ISO 11: Swedish ESC ( 0 S 27 40 48 83 1B 28 30 53

HP Spanish ESC ( 1 S 27 40 49 83 1B 28 31 53

ISO 17: Spanish ESC ( 2 S 27 40 50 83 1B 28 32 53

ISO 10: Swedish ESC ( 3 S 27 40 51 83 1B 28 33 53

ISO 16: Portuguese ESC ( 4 S 27 40 52 83 1B 28 34 53

ISO 84: Portuguese ESC ( 5 S 27 40 53 83 1B 28 35 53

ISO 85: Spanish ESC ( 6 S 27 40 54 83 1B 28 36 53

Windows 3.1 Latin5 ESC ( 5 T 27 40 53 84 1B 28 35 54

PC Turkish ESC ( 9 T 27 40 57 84 1B 28 39 54

ISO 6: ASCII ESC ( 0 U 27 40 48 85 1B 28 30 55

Legal ESC ( 1 U 27 40 49 85 1B 28 31 55

ISO 2: IRV ESC ( 2 U 27 40 50 85 1B 28 32 55

Roman 8 ESC ( 8 U 27 40 56 85 1B 28 38 55

Windows 3.0 Latin1 ESC ( 9 U 27 40 57 85 1B 28 39 55

PC-8 ESC ( 10 U 27 40 49 48 85 1B 28 31 30 55

PC-8 D/N ESC ( 11 U 27 40 49 49 85 1B 28 31 31 55

PC 850 ESC ( 12 U 27 40 49 50 85 1B 28 31 32 55

Pi Font ESC ( 15 U 27 40 49 53 85 1B 28 31 35 55

PC-852 ESC ( 17 U 27 40 49 55 85 1B 28 31 37 55

Windows 3.1 Latin1 ESC ( 19 U 27 40 49 57 85 1B 28 31 39 55

Character Set (original)

ROMAN 8 ESC ( s 1 C 27 40 115 49 67 1B 28 73 31 43

US ASCII ESC ( s 2 C 27 40 115 50 67 1B 28 73 32 43

GERMAN ESC ( s 3 C 27 40 115 51 67 1B 28 73 33 43

UK ENGLISH ESC ( s 4 C 27 40 115 52 67 1B 28 73 34 43

FRENCH ESC ( s 5 C 27 40 115 53 67 1B 28 73 35 43

DUTCH ESC ( s 6 C 27 40 115 54 67 1B 28 73 36 43

ITALIAN ESC ( s 7 C 27 40 115 55 67 1B 28 73 37 43

S. SPANISH ESC ( s 8 C 27 40 115 56 67 1B 28 73 38 43

A. ENGLISH W.P. ESC ( s 9 C 27 40 115 57 67 1B 28 73 39 43

U.K. ASCII/2 ESC ( s 10 C 27 40 115 49 48 67 1B 28 73 31 30 43

SYMBOL* ESC ( s 11 C 27 40 115 49 49 67 1B 28 73 31 31 43

INTERNATIONAL ESC ( s 12 C 27 40 115 49 50 67 1B 28 73 31 32 43

AMERICAN ENGLISH ESC ( s 13 C 27 40 115 49 51 67 1B 28 73 31 33 43

U.K. ASCII ESC ( s 14 C 27 40 115 49 52 67 1B 28 73 31 34 43

PORTUGUESE ESC ( s 15 C 27 40 115 49 53 67 1B 28 73 31 35 43

SWISS GERMAN ESC ( s 16 C 27 40 115 49 54 67 1B 28 73 31 36 43

AMERICAN SPANISH ESC ( s 17 C 27 40 115 49 55 67 1B 28 73 31 37 43

NORWEGIAN ESC ( s 18 C 27 40 115 49 56 67 1B 28 73 31 38 43

CANADIAN ESC ( s 19 C 27 40 115 49 57 67 1B 28 73 31 39 43

FINNISH/SWEDISH ESC ( s 20 C 27 40 115 50 48 67 1B 28 73 32 30 43

SOUTH AFRICA ESC ( s 21 C 27 40 115 50 49 67 1B 28 73 32 31 43

JAPANESE ENGLISH ESC ( s 37 C 27 40 115 51 55 67 1B 28 73 33 37 43

*The symbol character set is not available for Tennessee and Helsinki fonts.

USER’S GUIDE

A-48

Function Command Decimal Hexadecimal

PC-8 ESC ( s 25 C 27 40 115 50 53 67 1B 28 73 32 35 43

PC-8 D/N ESC ( s 23 C 27 40 115 50 51 67 1B 28 73 32 33 43

PC-850 ESC ( s 26 C 27 40 115 50 54 67 1B 28 73 32 36 43

PC-860 ESC ( s 27 C 27 40 115 50 55 67 1B 28 73 32 37 43

PC-863 ESC ( s 28 C 27 40 115 50 56 67 1B 28 73 32 38 43

PC-865 ESC ( s 29 C 27 40 115 50 57 67 1B 28 73 32 39 43

Fixed Pitch or P.S.

Fixed ESC ( s 0 P 27 40 115 48 80 1B 28 73 30 50

P.S. ESC ( s 1 P 27 40 115 49 80 1B 28 73 31 50

Character Pitch Selection 1 ESC ( s # H 27 40 115 ## 72 1B 28 73 ## 48

(#: char./inch)

Character Pitch Selection 2

10 Pitch ESC & k 0 S 27 38 107 48 83 1B 26 6B 30 53

16.6 Pitch ESC & k 2 S 27 38 107 50 83 1B 26 6B 32 53

12 Pitch ESC & k 4 S 27 38 107 52 83 1B 26 6B 34 53

Point Size ESC ( s # V 27 40 115 ## 86 1B 28 73 ## 56

(#: point size)

Italics or upright

Italics ESC ( s 1 S 27 40 115 49 83 1B 28 73 31 53

Upright ESC ( s 0 S 27 40 115 48 83 1B 28 73 30 53

Condensed ESC ( s 4 S 27 40 115 52 83 1B 28 73 34 53

Condensed Italic ESC ( s 5 S 27 40 115 53 83 1B 28 73 35 53

Compressed (Extra Condensed) ESC ( s 8 S 27 40 115 56 83 1B 28 73 38 53

Expanded ESC ( s 24 S 27 40 115 50 52 83 1B 28 73 32 34 53

Outline ESC ( s 32 S 27 40 115 51 50 83 1B 28 73 33 32 53

Inline ESC ( s 64 S 27 40 115 54 52 83 1B 28 73 36 34 53

Shadowed ESC ( s 128 S 27 40 115 49 50 56 83 1B 28 73 31 32 38 53

Outline Shadowed ESC ( s 160 S 27 40 115 49 54 48 83 1B 28 73 31 36 30 53

Stroke Weight ESC ( s # B 27 40 115 ## 66 1B 28 73 ## 42

Ultra Thin ESC ( s-7B 27 40 115 2D 55 66 1B 28 73 45 37 42

Extra Thin ESC ( s-6B 27 40 115 2D 54 66 1B 28 73 45 36 42

Thin ESC ( s-5B 27 40 115 2D 53 66 1B 28 73 45 35 42

Extra Light ESC ( s-4B 27 40 115 2D 52 66 1B 28 73 45 34 42

Light ESC ( s-3B 27 40 115 2D 51 66 1B 28 73 45 33 42

Demi Light ESC ( s-2B 27 40 115 2D 50 66 1B 28 73 45 32 42

Semi Light ESC ( s-1B 27 40 115 2D 49 66 1B 28 73 45 31 42

Medium (Normal) ESC ( s 0 B 27 40 115 48 66 1B 28 73 30 42

Semi Bold ESC ( s 1 B 27 40 115 49 66 1B 28 73 31 42

Demi Bold ESC ( s 2 B 27 40 115 50 66 1B 28 73 32 42

Bold ESC ( s 3 B 27 40 115 51 66 1B 28 73 33 42

Extra Bold ESC ( s 4 B 27 40 115 52 66 1B 28 73 34 42

Black ESC ( s 5 B 27 40 115 53 66 1B 28 73 35 42

Extra Black ESC ( s 6 B 27 40 115 54 66 1B 28 73 36 42

Ultra Black ESC ( s 7 B 27 40 115 55 66 1B 28 73 37 42

Scalable Font Ratio (original)

Set horizontal ratio ESC CR ! # H 27 13 33 # 72 1B 0D 21 # 48

(#=0.25 to 3 step 0.01)

Set vertical ratio ESC CR ! # V 27 13 33 # 86 1B 0D 21 # 56

(#=0.25 to 3 step 0.01)

APPENDICES

A-49

Function Command

Scalable Fonts

Intellifont-compatible Fonts (##: point size)

Alaska ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 1 b 4 3 6 2 T

Alaska Extrabold ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 4 b 4 3 6 2 T

Antique Oakland ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 4 1 6 8 T

Antique Oakland Bold ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 4 1 6 8 T

Antique Oakland Oblique ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 4 1 6 8 T

Brougham ESC ( s 0 p ## h 0 s 0 b 4 0 9 9 T

Brougham Bold ESC ( s 0 p ## h 0 s 3 b 4 0 9 9 T

Brougham Oblique ESC ( s 0 p ## h 1 s 0 b 4 0 9 9 T

Brougham BoldOblique ESC ( s 0 p ## h 1 s 3 b 4 0 9 9 T

Cleveland Condensed ESC ( s 1 p ## v 4 s 3 b 4 1 4 0 T

Connecticut ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 4 1 1 6 T

Guatemala Antique ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 4 1 9 7 T

Guatemala Italic ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 4 1 9 7 T

Guatemala Bold ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 4 1 9 7 T

Guatemala Boldltalic ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 4 1 9 7 T

LetterGothic ESC ( s 0 p ## h 0 s 0 b 4 1 0 2 T

LetterGothic Bold ESC ( s 0 p ## h 0 s 3 b 4 1 0 2 T

LetterGothic Oblique ESC ( s 0 p ## h 1 s 0 b 4 1 0 2 T

Maryland ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 4 2 9 7 T

Oklahoma ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 4 1 1 3 T

Oklahoma Bold ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 4 1 1 3 T

Oklahoma Oblique ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 4 1 1 3 T

Oklahoma BoldOblique ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 4 1 1 3 T

PC Brussels Light ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s - 3 b 4 1 4 3 T

PC Brussels Demi ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 2 b 4 1 4 3 T

PC Brussels LightItalic ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s - 3 b 4 1 4 3 T

PC Brussels DemiItalic ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 2 b 4 1 4 3 T

PC Tennessee Roman ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 4 1 0 1 T

PC Tennessee Bold ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 4 1 0 1 T

PC Tennessee Italic ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 4 1 0 1 T

PC Tennessee BoldItalic ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 4 1 0 1 T

Utah ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 4 1 4 8 T

Utah Bold ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 4 1 4 8 T

Utah Oblique ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 4 1 4 8 T

Utah BoldOblique ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 4 1 4 8 T

Utah Condensed ESC ( s 1 p ## v 4 s 0 b 4 1 4 8 T

Utah Condensed Bold ESC ( s 1 p ## v 4 s 3 b 4 1 4 8 T

Utah Condensed Oblique ESC ( s 1 p ## v 5 s 0 b 4 1 4 8 T

Utah Condensed BoldOblique ESC ( s 1 p ## v 5 s 3 b 4 1 4 8 T

TrueType-compatible Fonts (##: point size)

BR Symbol ESC ( 1 9 M ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 1 6 6 8 6 T

Helsinki ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 1 6 6 0 2 T

Helsinki Bold ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 1 6 6 0 2 T

Helsinki Oblique ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 1 6 6 0 2 T

Helsinki BoldOblique ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 1 6 6 0 2 T

Tennessee Roman ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 1 6 9 0 1 T

Tennessee Bold ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 1 6 9 0 1 T

Tennessee Italic ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 1 6 9 0 1 T

Tennessee BoldItalic ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 1 6 9 0 1 T

W Dingbats ESC ( 5 7 9 L ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 3 1 4 0 2 T

USER’S GUIDE

A-50

Function Command

Type 1 Font Compatible Fonts (##: point size)

Atlanta Book ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 1 5 5 T

Atlanta Demi ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 1 5 5 T

Atlanta BookOblique ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 1 5 5 T

Atlanta DemiOblique ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 1 5 5 T

Calgary MediumItalic ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 1 5 9 T

Copenhagen Roman ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 1 5 7 T

Copenhagen Bold ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 1 5 7 T

Copenhagen Italic ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 1 5 7 T

Copenhagen BoldItalic ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 1 5 7 T

Portugal Roman ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 1 5 8 T

Portugal Bold ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 1 5 8 T

Portugal Italic ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 1 5 8 T

Portugal BoldItalic ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 1 5 8 T

Bitmapped Fonts

LetterGothic16.66 ESC ( s 0 p 16.67 h 8.5 v 0 s 0 b 1 3 0 T

OCR-A ESC ( 0 O ESC ( s 0 p 10 h 12 v 0 s 0 b 1 0 4 T

OCR-B ESC ( 1 O ESC ( s 0 p 10 h 12 v 0 s 0 b 1 1 0 T

Brother Original Fonts

Bermuda Script ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 1 3 4 T

Germany ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 1 3 2 T

San Diego ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 5 b 1 3 3 T

US Roman ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 1 3 5 T

APPENDICES

A-51

CCITT G3/G4 and TIFF (original command)

One of the unique features of the PCL mode of this printer is it supports

CCITT G3/G4 type data compression and TIFF format.

■ CCITT G3/G4 (Raster Graphic Mode 1152)

The printer’s PCL mode supports CCITT G3/G4 type graphic data

compression.

This format is popular in optical document storage area as this

compression is effective to store black and white type pictures.

Compression mode for CCITT G3/G4 is 1152 and the command becomes

ESC * b 1152 M.

As G3/G4 format does not have picture size/resolution information, the

printer requires a header at the beginning of the picture data. The header

size is 94 byte. Both the header and the picture data are transferred by one

transfer graphics data command (ESC * b ### W). Normal PCL transfer

graphics data command has a limitation of the data size and ### should

not exceed 32767. Unlike other mode, mode 1152 is special and this

mode does not have 32767 byte size limitation.

Print model is not applied to this type of raster graphics.

The mode 1152 graphic data consists of the following data structure. The

picture data follows the header.

Header 94 bytes

File length

Picture = ####

CCITT G3/G4 data of ESC*b####W

Picture Data length

Header format is described on the next page.

You have to specify mode 1152 by sending ESC *b1152M command for

each graphic data transfer.

About CCITT G3/G4 data format, please refer to CCITT (THE

INTERNATIONAL TELEGRAPH AND TELEPHONE

CONSULTATIVE COMMITTEE) BLUE BOOK Volume VII.

USER’S GUIDE

A-52

Mode 1152 graphic data header data structure

Position Data Description

0-1 6E 6E ‘nn’ This is header ID.

2-3 0A 00 reserved (Header Version)

4-7 5E 00 00 00 Picture data start offset from header top

8-11 File Length File length including 94 byte header. If file length is 65,536

byte, these 4 bytes become “00 00 01 00”.

12-13 01 00 reserved

14-15 01 00 reserved

16-19 4A 00 00 00 reserved

20-21 compression 02 00: Fax MH format

03 00: Fax MR format

04 00: Fax G4 format

22-55 00....00 All zero

56-59 Picture Data Length

If picture data length is 65,442 (65,536 - 94) byte, these

4 bytes become “A2 FF 00 00”.

60-61 01 00 bit/pixel

62-63 01 00 bit/pixel

64-65 Pixels/line If picture dot width = 2400, these 2 bytes become “60 09”.

66-67 Pixels/line Same as 64-65

68-69 Lines/picture If picture line count = 3100, these 2 bytes become “1C 0C”.

70-71 Lines/picture Same as 70-71

72-73 00 00 reserved

74-75 Photo metrics 00 00: data 0 = white 01 00: data 0 = black

76-77 02 00 reserved (Endian format)

78-79 Bit Fill Order 01 00: filled from MSB

02 00: filled from LSB

80-81 01 00 reserved

82-83 00 00 reserved (min. pixel value)

84-85 01 00 reserved (max pixel value)

86-87 horizontal resolution (200,300,400,600)

C8 00 00 00 : 200 dpi

2C 01 00 00 : 300 dpi

90 01 00 00 : 400 dpi

58 02 00 00 : 600 dpi

400 and 600 dpi are available when printer

operates in 600 dpi.

88-89 vertical resolution (200,300,400,600)

C8 00 00 00 : 200 dpi

2C 01 00 00 : 300 dpi

90 01 00 00 : 400 dpi

58 02 00 00 : 600 dpi

The printer accepts different values for vertical and

horizontal resolutions.

400/600 dpi are available when printer operates in 600 dpi.

90-91 02 00 reserved (resolution unit = inch)

92-93 00 00 reserved (error code)

APPENDICES

A-53

■ TIFF Format (Raster Graphic Mode 1024) & Advanced Photoscale

Technology

The printer’s PCL mode supports TIFF Version 5.0 file format as a

format to transfer raster graphics data.

Mode set command for TIFF file format is ESC *b1024M.

One transfer graphics data command (ESC*b###W) should contain

whole TIFF file.

In mode 1024, transfer graphics data command byte count does not have

a limitation of 32,767 byte.

The printer supports both ‘MM’ (big endian) format and ‘II’ (little

endian) format.

Print model is not applied to this type of data transfer.

The printer has some limitations on the TIFF file format.

1. Tags position has to be prior to the picture (strip) data.

2. Compression tag --- Tag ID:259

The printer supports 1, 2, 3, 4 and 32773.

1: no compression (Bits/Sample=1,4,8)

2: CCITT G3 MH (Bits/Sample=1)

3: CCITT G3 MR (Bits/Sample=1)

4: CCITT G4 (Bits/Sample=1)

32773: Pack Bit (Bits/Sample=1)

3. Sample/pixel --- Tag ID:277

This value should be 1. This means the printer accepts only

monochrome TIFF file.

4. Bits/Sample --- Tag ID:258

The printer supports 1, 4 and 8.

If you specify 4 or 8 and the printer resolution is 600 dpi, the

printer prints that page utilizing APT.

5. Horizontal resolution (Tag ID=282) and Vertical resolution (Tag

ID=283)

Compression type Bits/Sample Available Resolution APT

No Compression 4, 8 From 1 dpi to 300 dpi ON

No Compression

Pack Bit 1 Printer’s Resolution

(300 or 600 dpi) OFF

CCITT G3 & G4 1 200,300,400,600 dpi

400 & 600 dpi are only

when printer operates

in 600 dpi.

OFF

We recommend 150 dpi or less resolution for APT to reduce data size.

USER’S GUIDE

A-54

Horizontal 1200-dpi Image Format Mode(Raster Graphic Mode

1027)

The printer supports 1200 dpi printing for special image formats in 1200

dpi mode.

We recommend that the installed printer memory is 10 Mbytes or more

for 1200 dpi printing.

To set 1200 dpi mode,

1. Set 1200 dpi printing mode by using the following PJL command:

@PJL SET RAS1200MODE = ON

2. Choose PCL mode with the following PJL command:

@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE = PCL

(If you select a mode other than PCL mode, 1200 dpi printing mode

cannot be selected.)

The PCL Mode set command for 1200 dpi Image Format is ESC

*b1027M.

The transfer raster data command (ESC*b###W) then transfers horizontal

1200 dpi data.

<1200 dpi Graphic Data Compression Format>

This compression format consists of blocks of data 64 dots down the page

starting from the leading edge of the paper.

Ex.) If the graphic data extends over three bands as shown in the

following diagram, it transfers the data as three blocks of data:

ESC*b##W <Block 1> <Block 2> <Block 3>

In mode 1027, the transfer graphic data command byte count does not

have a limitation of 32,767 bytes.

128

192

256

320

Block 1

Block 3

Block 2

Band 1

Band 3

Band 4

Band 2

Band 5

APPENDICES

A-55

The block data is composed as follows:

Position Data Description

0 - 1 Block length n - 2

2 - 3 Horizontal position dots from the left of the page

4 - 5 Vertical position dots from the leading edge of the

page

6 Height dots number of image vertical dots

7 - 8 Width words number of image horizontal 16 bit

words

9 - (n - 1) Compression data compression image data

Ex.) Data is at horizontal position = 256, vertical position = 64,

height = 32 dots, width = 100 x 16 bit words (1600 dots), and

compression data is 800 bytes;

ESC*b809W 03h 27h 01h 00h 00h 40h 20h 00h 64h [Data800Byte]

_ _ _ | _ |

a b c d e f

Data compression compresses the original image data word by word (16

bits).

The compressed data consists of both horizontal compression which uses

16 bit, 8 bit and 4 bit repeating patterns within 1 word or 2 words of data,

and vertical compression which indicates to repeat the same data as in the

previous line with 1 word of data.

Non-compressed data

When the most significant bit in the first 2 bytes is 0, the printer goes into

non-compression mode. The following 11 bits then indicate the number

of words of data, and the least significant 4 bits are not used. After that,

the image data follows word by word.

15 14 4 3 0

0 data word count (11 bits) not used

data 1 (16 bits)

data n (16 bits)

(256, 64)

1600

128

Band 1

Band 2

a: Block length(807)

b: Horizontal position(256)

c: Vertical position(64)

d: Height dots(32)

e: Width words(100)

f: Compression image data

USER’S GUIDE

A-56

16 bit repeating compressed data

When the most significant 3 bits in the first 2 bytes are in the order 1, 0,

0, the remaining 13 bits indicate the number of times to repeat 16 bit data.

The following 2 bytes should be the 16 bit data to repeat.

15 14 13 12 0

1 0 0 number of repeats(13 bits)

data to repeat(16 bits)

8 bit repeating compressed data

When the most significant 3 bits in the first 2 bytes are in the order 1, 1,

0, the following 5 bits indicate the number of times to repeat 16 bits (two

by 8 bits) data. The remaining 8 bits should be the 8 bit data to repeat.

15 14 13 12 8 7 0

1 1 0 number of repeats data to repeat(8 bits)

(5 bits)

4 bit repeating compression data

When the most significant 3 bits in the first 2 bytes are in the order 1, 0,

1, the following 4 bits indicate 4 bit data to repeat. The remaining 9 bits

indicate the number of times to repeat the 16 bit (4 by 4 bits) data.

15 14 13 12 9 8 0

1 0 1 data to repeat number or repeats(9 bits)

(4 bits)

Vertical repeating compressed data

When the most significant 3 bits in the first 2 bytes are in the order 1, 1,

1, the remaining 13 bits indicate the same data words as in the previous

line.

15 14 13 12 0

1 1 1 the same data words as in the previous line (13 bits)

The printer can not support the APT and HRC function in the 1200 dpi

printing mode.

APPENDICES

A-57

HP-GL/2 Command Sets

Command Mnemonic Parameters

Dual Context Extensions

ENTER PCL MODE ESC % # A 0-Retain previous PCL cursor position

and palette

1-Use current HP-GL/2 pen position and

palette

RESET ESC E None

PRIMARY FONT FI Font_ID

SECONDARY FONT FN Font_ID

SCALABLE OR BITMAPPED FONTS SB 0-Scalable fonts only

1-Bitmapped fonts allowed

Palette Extensions

TRANSPARENCY MODE TR 0-Off (opaque)

1-On (transparent)

SCREENED VECTORS SV [screen_type [, shading [, index]]]

Vector Group

ARC ABSOLUTE AA x_center, y_center, sweep_angle

[, chord_angle];

ARC RELATIVE AR x_increment, y_increment, sweep_angle

[, chord_angle];

ABSOLUTE ARC THREE POINT AT x_inter, y_inter, x_end, y_end

[,chord_angle];

BEZIER ABSOLUTE BZ x1_control_pt, y1_control_pt

x2_control_pt, y2_control_pt

x3_control_pt, y3_control_pt

[, params … [, parms ]].

BEZIER RELATIVE BR x1_control_pt_increments,

y1_control_pt_increments,

x2_control_pt_increments,

y2_control_pt_increments,

x3_control_pt_increments,

y3_control_pt_increments

[, params … [, parms ]]; PLOT

ABSOLUTE PA [x, y … [, x, y]];

PLOT RELATIVE PR [x, y … [, x, y]];

PEN DOWN PD [x, y … [, x, y]];

PEN UP PU [x, y … [, x, y]];

RELATIVE ARC THREE POINT RT x_incr_inter, y_incr_inter, x_incr_end,

y_incr-end [, chord_angle];

POLYLINE ENCODED PE [flag [val]|coord_pair …

[flag[val]|coord_pair ]];

Polygon Group

CIRCLE CI radius [, chord_angle];

FILL RECTANGLE ABSOLUTE RA x_coordinate, y_coordinate;

FILL RECTANGLE RELATIVE RR x_increment, y_increment;

EDGE RECTANGLE ABSOLUTE EA x_coordinate, y_coordinate;

EDGE RECTANGLE RELATIVE ER x_increment, y_increment;

FILL WEDGE WG radius, start_angle, sweep_angle

[, chord_angle];

USER’S GUIDE

A-58

Command Mnemonic Parameters

EDGE WEDGE EW radius, start_angle, sweep_angle

[, chord_angle];

POLYGON MODE PM polygon_definition;

FILL POLYGON FP 0 Odd/Even fill

EDGE POLYGON EP 1 non-zero winding fill

Character Group

SELECT STANDARD FONT SS

SELECT ALTERNATE FONT SA

ABSOLUTE DIRECTION DI [run, rise];

RELATIVE DIRECTION DR [run, rise];

ABSOLUTE CHARACTER SIZE SI [width, height];

RELATIVE CHARACTER SIZE SR [width, height];

CHARACTER SLANT SL [tangent_of_angle];

EXTRA SPACE ES [width [, height]]

STANDARD FONT DEFINITION SD [kind, value … [, kind, value]];

ALTERNATE FONT DEFINITION AD [kind, value … [, kind, value]];

CHARACTER FILL MODE CF [fill_mode [, edge_pen]];

LABEL ORIGIN LO [position];

LABEL LB [char … [char]] l bterm

DEFINE LABEL TERMINATOR DT [l bterm [, mode]];

CHARACTER PLOT CP [spaces, lines];

TRANSPARENT DATA TD [mode];

DEFINE VARIABLE TEXT PATH DV [path [, line]];

Line and Fill Attributes Group

LINE TYPE LT [line_type [, pattern_length [, mode]]];

LINE ATTRIBUTES LA [kind, value … [, kind, value]];

PEN WIDTH PW [width [, pen]];

PEN WIDTH UNIT SELECTION WU [type];

SELECT PEN SP [pen];

SYMBOL MODE SM [char];

FILL TYPE FT [fill_type [, option 1 [, option 2]]];

ANCHOR CORNER AC [x_coordinate, y_coordinate];

RASTER FILL DEFINITION RF [index, width, height, pen_nbr [, …

pen_nbr]];

USER DEFINED LINE TYPE UL [index [, gap 1 … gap 20]];

(Extended for PCL5C)

NUMBER OF PENS NP [number_of_pen]:

PEN COLOR ASSIGNMENT PC [pen[,primary 1,primary 2,primary 3]];

SET RELATIVE COLOR RANGE CR [black_ref_blue,white_ref_blue,

black_ref_green,white_ref_green,

black_ref_red,white_ref_red];

Configuration and Status Group

COMMENT CO

SCALE SC [x 1, x 2, y 1, y 2 [, type [, left, bottom]]];

[x 1, x factor, y 1, y factor, 2];

INPUT WINDOW IW [x L L, y L L, x U R, y U R];

INPUT P1 AND P2 IP [p 1 x, p 1 y [, p 2 x, p 2 y]];

INPUT RELATIVE P1 AND P2 IR [p 1 x, p 1 y [, p 2 x, p 2 y]];

DEFAULT VALUES DF

INITIALIZE IN

ROTATE COORDINATE SYSTEM RO [angle];

APPENDICES

A-59

Printer Job Language Commands Syntax

Command Function and Syntax

Syntax Rules

[ ] Brackets indicate optional parameters.

< > Indicates special characters and items

Special Characters and Items DEC. HEX.

<HT> Horizontal Tab (element of white space) 09 09

<LF> Line Feed (PJL command terminator) 10 0A

<CR> Carriage Return (optional parameter) 13 0D

<SP> Space (element of white space) 32 20

<ESC> Escape (used only for UEL/SPJL) 27 1B

<FF> Form Feed 12 0C

(terminator for multiple line reply)

<WS> White Space<SP> or <HT> or combination of <SP> and <HT>

<PC> Printable Characters (character code 33 through 126, and

161 through 254)

<Words> Beginning with <PC>, and combination of <PC> and <WS>

Printer Job Language Commands Syntax

COMMENT @PJL COMMENT <Words> [<CR>] <LF>

DEFAULT @PJL DEFAULT [LPARM: emulation] variable = value

[<CR>] <LF>

DINQUIRE @PJL DINQUIRE [LPARM: emulation] variable [<CR>] <LF>

Reply @PJL DINQUIRE [LPARM: emulation] variable <CR> <LF>

value <CR> <LF> <FF>

ECHO @PJL ECHO [<Words>] [<CR>] <LF>

Reply @PJL ECHO [<Words>] <CR> <LF> <FF>

ENTER @PJL ENTER LANGUAGE = emulation [<CR>] <LF>

EOJ @PJL EOJ [NAME = job name] [<CR>] <LF>

INFO @PJL INFO read only variable [<CR>] <LF>

Reply @PJL INFO read only variable <CR> <LF>

[1 or more lines of printable characters or <WS> followed

by <CR> <LF>] <FF>

INITIALIZE @PJL INITIALIZE [<CR>] <LF>

INQUIRE @PJL INQUIRE [LPARM: emulation] variable [<CR>] <LF>

Reply @PJL INQUIRE [LPARM: emulation] variable <CR> <LF>

value <CR> <LF> <FF>

JOB @PJL JOB [NAME = “job name”] [START = first page]

[END = last page] [<CR>] <LF>

OPMSG @PJL OPMSG DISPLAY = “message” [<CR>] <LF>

RDYMSG @PJL RDYMSG DISPLAY = “message” [<CR>] <LF>

RESET @PJL RESET [<CR>] <LF>

SET @PJL SET [LPARM: emulation] variable = value [<CR>] <LF>

STMSG @PJL STMSG DISPLAY = “message” [<CR>] <LF>

Reply @PJL STMSG DISPLAY = “message” <CR> <LF>

key <CR> <LF> <FF>

Exit Current Emulation/Start PJL <ESC> % - 12345X

(UEL/SPJL)

USTATUS @PJL USTATUS variable = value [<CR>] <LF>

Reply @PJL USTATUS variable <CR> <LF>

[1 or more lines of printable characters or <WS> followed

by <CR> <LF>] <FF>

USTATUSOFF @PJL USTATUSOFF [<CR>] <LF>

(No Operation) @PJL [<CR>] <LF>

USER’S GUIDE

A-60

EPSON FX-850 Mode

Command name Function Sequence Decimal Hexadecimal

Null Ignored NUL 0 00

Bell Ignored BEL 7 07

Space Moves the cursor one position to the right SP 32 20

Backspace Moves the cursor one position to the left BS 8 08

Line Feed Moves down one line LF 10 0A

Form Feed Ejects a page (if data has been printed on it) FF 12 0C

Carriage Return Moves cursor to left margin CR 13 0D

Home Positioning Moves the cursor to the home position ESC < 27 60 1B 3C

Select Printer Ignored DC1 17 11

Deselect Printer Ignored DC3 19 13

Set MSB=0 Sets most significant bit to zero ESC= 27 61 1B 3D

Set MSB=1 Sets most significant bit to one ESC > 27 62 1B 3E

Cancel MSB Settings Cancels MSB settings ESC # 27 35 1B 23

Expand Printable Allows characters 128 (d) through 159 (d) ESC 6 27 54 1B 36

Code Area and 255 (d) to be printed

Cancel Expanded Cancels printing of characters 128 (d) ESC 7 27 55 1B 37

Printable Code Area through 159 (d) and 255 (d)

Expand Printable Allows characters 0 (d) through 31 (d) and ESC I 1 27 73 49 1B 49 31

Code Area 128 (d) through 159 (d) to be printed

Cancel Expand Cancels printing of characters 0 (d) ESC I 0 27 73 48 1B 49 30

Printable Code Area through 31 (d) and 129 (d) through 159 (d)

Change Emulation Changes the emulation of the printer. All ESC CR m 27 13 m 1B 0D m

(original) data received so far will be printed and

the page ejected. m is an ASCII code.

m=AB - BR-Script 2 Batch Mode

m=AI - BR-Script 2 Interactive Mode

m=E - Reset Epson Mode

m=GL - HP-GL Mode

m=H - HP LaserJet Mode

m=I - IBM Proprinter Mode

User Reset Restore to User Settings ESC CR ! 27 13 33 1B 0D 21

(n=0 to 2) n R n 82 n 52

Paper Input Control Controls the paper input ESC EM n 27 25 n 1B 19 n

n=0 - Initialize Feeder Mode

n=1 - Feed From MP Tray

n=2 - Feed From Upper Cassette (Tray 1)

n=3 - Feed From Lower Cassette (Tray 2)

n=R - Eject Paper

Duplex/Simplex Print Sets simplex or duplex print mode ESC CR ! 27 13 33 1B 0D 21

(available when duplex n=0 - Simplex n D n 68 n 44

unit is installed) n=1 - Duplex & long edge binding

(original) n=2 - Duplex & short edge binding

Page Side Selection Sets page side selection ESC CR ! 27 13 33 1B 0D 21

(available when duplex n=0 - Next side n S n 83 n 53

unit is installed) n=1 - Front side

(original) n=2 - Back side

Initialize Printer Initializes printer and clears print buffer ESC @ 27 64 1B 40

(prints data)

Set Form Length Sets page length in current line spacing ESC C n 27 67 n 1B 43 n

(1 n127)

Set Left Margin Sets left margin n characters from home ESC l n 27 108 n 1B 6C n

position (range depends on type size and

paper size)

APPENDICES

A-61

Command name Function Sequence Decimal Hexadecimal

Set Right Margin Sets right margin n columns from the left ESC Q n 27 81 n 1B 51 n

margin (range depends on type size and

paper size)

Set Skip-over Sets bottom margin at the n-th line, ESC N n 27 78 n 1B 4E n

Perforation counting from the bottom

Cancel Skip-over Cancels the setting of the bottom margin ESC O 27 79 1B 4F

Perforation

Set 1/6” Line Spacing Line spacing is set to 1/6 inch ESC 2 27 50 1B 32

Set 1/8” Line Spacing Line spacing is set to 1/8 inch ESC 0 27 48 1B 30

Set 7/72” Line Spacing Line spacing is set to 7/72 inch ESC 1 27 49 1B 31

Set n/72” Line Spacing Line spacing is set to n/72 inch (0 n85) ESC A n 27 65 n 1B 41 n

Set n/216” Line Line spacing is set to n/216 inch (0 n255) ESC 3 n 27 51 n 1B 33 n

Spacing

Perform n/216” Advances paper (moves cursor) by n/216 ESC J n 27 74 n 1B 4A n

Paper Feed inch

Perform n/216” Reverse feeds paper (moves cursor) by ESC j n 27 106 n 1B 6A n

Reverse Paper Feed n/216 inch

Set Horizontal Tab Sets up to 32 horizontal tab stops ESC D n1 … 27 68 n1 … 1B 44 n1 …

Stops (terminated by a NUL) nk NUL nk 0 nk 00

Horizontal Tab Moves to next horizontal tab HT 9 09

Set Vertical Tab Sets up to 16 vertical tab stops ESC b n1 … 27 98 n1 … 1B 62 n1 …

Stops (terminated by a NUL) nk NUL nk 0 nk 00

Vertical Tab Moves to next vertical tab stop VT 11 0B

Select VFU Selects Vertical Format Unit ESC / n 27 47 n 1B 2F n

Set Vertical Tab Sets up to 16 vertical tab stops in selected ESC B n1 … 27 66 n1 … 1B 42 n1 …

Stops (VFU Vertical Format Unit (selected by nk NUL nk 0 nk 00

Channel) previous command). Terminated by NUL

Set Absolute Print Moves (n1 + n2 x 256)/60” from left ESC $ n1 n2 27 36 n1 n2 1B 24 n1 n2

Position margin

Set Relative Print Moves (n1 + n2 x 256)/120” from current ESC \ n1 n2 27 92 n1 n2 1B 5C n1 n2

Position position

Set Pica Pitch Selects 10 cpi printing ESC P 27 80 1B 50

Set Elite Pitch Selects 12 cpi printing ESC M 27 77 1B 4D

Set Proportional Selects proportional spacing mode and ESC p 1 27 112 49 1B 70 31

Spacing Mode fonts (BS disabled)

Disable Proportion- Disables proportional spacing mode ESC p 0 27 112 48 1B 70 30

al Spacing Mode

Set Condensed Mode Sets condensed printing SI or ESC SI 15 or 27 15 0F or 1B 0F

Cancel Condensed Cancels condensed printing mode DC2 18 12

Mode

Set Emphasized Selects boldface printing ESC E or 27 69 or 27 1B 45 or 1B

Mode ESC G 71 47

Cancel Emphasized ESC F cancels ESC E boldface and ESC H ESC F or 27 70 or 27 1B 46 or 1B

Mode cancels ESC G boldface ESC H 72 48

Set Enlarged Selects enlarged characters for one SO or 14 or 0E or

Character Mode line only ESC SO or 27 14 or 1B 0E or

ESC W 1 27 87 49 1B 57 31

Cancel Enlarged Cancels above settings (CAN cancels DC4 or 20 or 24 or 14 or 18 or

Character Mode SO only, and DC4 cancels SO and CAN or 27 87 48 1B 57 30

ESC SO only) ESC W 0

USER’S GUIDE

A-62

Command name Function Sequence Decimal Hexadecimal

Set/Cancel Double- Sets (n = 1) or cancels (n = 0) double-high ESC w n 27 119 n 1B 77 n

High Mode mode

Set Italic Print Mode Selects italic printing ESC 4 27 52 1B 34

Cancel Italic Print Cancels italic printing ESC 5 27 53 1B 35

Mode

Set Super/Subscript Sets either superscript (n=0) or subscript ESC S n 27 83 n 1B 53 n

Print Mode (n=1) printing

Cancel Super/ Cancels effect superscript or subscript ESC T 27 84 1B 54

Subscript Print Mode printing

Set/Cancel Underline Sets (n=1) or cancels (n=0) underlined ESC - n 27 45 n 1B 2D n

Print Mode printing (including spaces)

Select Justification n=0: Left justify, n=1: Centering ESC a n 27 97 n 1B 61 n

n=2: Right justify, n=3: Fully justify

Set Intercharacter Adds n/120” space to each character ESC SP n 27 32 n 1B 20 n

Space

Select Print Mode Allows combinations of attributes to be ESC ! n 27 33 n 1B 21 n

added to following text

Select Epson/IBM Selects either Epson (n=0) or IBM (n=1) ESC t n 27 116 n 1B 74 n

character set character set

Select International Selects character set ESC R n 27 82 n 1B 52 n

Character Set

Define Download Defines downloaded characters ESC & NUL 27 38 0 n m 1B 26 00 n

Characters n m a {data} a {data} m a {data}

Select Download Selects either downloaded (n=1) or ESC % n 27 37 n 1B 25 n

Character Mode internal (n=0) character set

Copy ROM Copies internal character data to ESC : 0 0 0 27 58 48 48 1B 3A 30

Characters to download RAM area 48 30 30

Download RAM

Select Bit Image Selects and prints bit image data ESC * m n1 27 42 m n1 1B 2A m n1

Mode n2 {data} n2 {data} n2 {data}

Set 9-dot Bit Image Selects and prints “9-dot” bit image ESC ^ a n1 27 94 a n1 1B 5E a n1

Mode data n2 {data} n2 {data} n2 {data}

Set Single-Density Selects and prints single-density bit image ESC K n1 n2 27 75 n1 n2 1B 4B n1 n2

Bit Image Mode data {data} {data} {data}

Set Double-Density Selects and prints double-density bit ESC L n1 n2 27 76 n1 n2 1B 4C n1 n2

Bit Image Mode image data {data} {data} {data}

Set Double-Speed Selects and prints “double-speed” double- ESC Y n1 n2 27 89 n1 n2 1B 59 n1 n2

Double-Density Bit density bit image data {data} {data} {data}

Image Mode

Set Quadruple- Selects and prints quadruple-density bit ESC Z n1 n2 27 90 n1 n2 1B 5A n1 n2

Density Bit Image image data {data} {data} {data}

Mode

Reassign Graphics Changes bit image density ESC ? n m 27 63 n m 1B 3F n m

Mode

Set Scalable Font Selects horizontal ratio ESC CR ! 27 13 33 1B 0D 21

Ratio (original) (n=0.25 to 3 step 0.01) n H n 72 n 48

Selects vertical ratio ESC CR ! 27 13 33 1B 0D 21

(n=0.25 to 3 step 0.01) n V n 86 n 56

Execute Card Data Execute saved card data ESC CR ! 27 13 33 1B 0D 21

(original) n E n 69 n 45

APPENDICES

A-63

IBM Proprinter XL Mode

Command name Function Sequence Decimal Hexadecimal

Null Ignored NUL 0 00

Bell Ignored BEL 7 07

Space Moves the cursor one character to the right SP 32 20

Backspace Moves the cursor one character to the left BS 8 08

Line Feed Moves the cursor to the next line LF 10 0A

Form Feed Prints the data in the buffer and ejects the FF 12 0C

page (if the buffer is empty, this command

is ignored)

Carriage Return Moves the cursor to the left margin on the CR 13 0D

current line. If Auto LF has been set from

the front panel or by software (ESC 5 1),

the cursor will move down one line

Set/Cancel Auto Sets (n=1) or cancels (n=0) auto line feed ESC 5 n 27 53 n 1B 35 n

Line Feed Mode Overrides the front panel setting

Select Printer Selects printer following deselection DC1 17 11

(ESC Q)

Deselect Printer Ignored DC3 19 13

Deselect Printer Deselects printer, which will not accept ESC Q 2 2 27 81 50 50 1B 51 32 32

data until a DC1 is received ESC Q 3 27 51 51 1B 51 33

Set Epson Selects Epson FX-850 emulation mode. ESC @ 27 64 1B 40

Emulation Mode All data in the buffer is printed and the

page ejected

Change Emulation Changes the emulation of the printer. All ESC CR m 27 13 m 1B 0D m

(original) data received so far will be printed and

the page ejected. m is an ASCII code.

m=AB - BR-Script 2 Batch Mode

m=AI - BR-Script 2 Interactive Mode

m=E - Epson Mode

m=GL - HP-GL Mode

m=H - HP LaserJet Mode

m=I - Reset IBM Proprinter Mode

User Reset Restore to User Settings ESC CR ! 27 13 33 1B 0D 21

(n=0 to 2) n R n 82 n 52

Paper Input Control Controls the paper input ESC EM n 27 25 n 1B 19 n

n=0 - Feed From Manual Feed Slot

n=1 - Feed From MP Tray

n=2 - Feed From Upper Cassette (Tray 1)

n=3 - Feed From Lower Cassette (Tray 2)

n=R - Eject Paper

Duplex/Simplex Print Sets simplex or duplex print mode ESC CR ! 27 13 33 1B 0D 21

(available when duplex n=0 - Simplex n D n 68 n 44

unit is installed) n=1 - Duplex & long edge binding

(original) n=2 - Duplex & short edge binding

Page Side Selection Sets page side selection ESC CR ! 27 13 33 1B 0D 21

(available when duplex n=0 - Next side n S n 83 n 53

unit is installed) n=1 - Front side

(original) n=2 - Back side

Set Form Length Sets form length to n lines at current ESC C n 27 67 n 1B 43 n

spacing (1 n255)

Sets from length to n inches at current ESC C 0 n 27 67 48 n 1B 43 30 n

spacing (0 n15)

Set Right and Left n1 is used to set the left margin, and n2 ESC X n1 n2 27 88 n1 n2 1B 58 n1 n2

Margins the right margin (1 n1 n2 255)

Set Skip-over Sets bottom margin at n-th line, counting ESC N n 27 78 n 1B 4E n

Perforation from the bottom (1 n255)

USER’S GUIDE

A-64

Command name Function Sequence Decimal Hexadecimal

Cancel Skip-over Cancels the bottom margin setting ESC O 27 79 1B 4F

Perforation

Set 1/8” Line Sets line spacing to 1/8 inch ESC 0 27 48 1B 30

Spacing Mode

Set 7/72” Line Sets line spacing to 7/72 inch ESC 1 27 49 1B 31

Spacing Mode

Save n/72” Line Sets line spacing mode to n/72 inch ESC A n 27 65 n 1B 41 n

Spacing Mode (1 n85). Activated by ESC 2 command

Activate n/72” Activates line spacing mode set by ESC A ESC 2 27 50 1B 32

Line Spacing

Mode set by ESC A

Set n/216” Line Sets line spacing to n/216 inch (1 n255) ESC 3 n 27 51 n 1B 33 n

Spacing

Execute n/216” Advances the cursor by n/216 inch ESC J n 27 74 n 1B 4A n

Line Spacing

Set Horizontal Tab Sets up to 28 horizontal tab stops ESC D n1 … 27 68 n1 … 1B 44 n1 …

Stops (terminated by NUL) nk NUL nk NUL nk NUL

Horizontal Tab Advances to next horizontal tab (if none HT 9 09

have been defined, default tab stops are

set every 8 columns)

Set Vertical Tab Sets up to 64 vertical tab stops ESC B n1 … 27 66 n1 … 1B 42 n1 …

Stops (terminated by NUL) nk NUL nk NUL nk NUL

Vertical Tab Advances to next vertical tab stops VT 11 0B

(or LF if none have been defined)

Restore to Default Clears any vertical tab stops, and sets ESC R 27 82 1B 52

Tab Settings default horizontal tab stops every 8

columns

Set Pica Pitch Selects 10 cpi printing DC2 18 12

Set Elite Pitch Selects 12 cpi printing ESC : 27 58 1B 3A

Set/Cancel Sets (n=1) or cancels (n=0) proportionally- ESC P n 27 80 n 1B 50 n

Proportional spaced printing

Spacing Mode

Set Condensed Selects condensed characters (canceled SI 15 0F

Character Mode by DC2)

Set Emphasized Selects emphasized printing (canceled ESC E 27 69 1B 45

Character Mode by ESC F)

Cancel Emphasized Cancels emphasized printing ESC F 27 70 1B 46

Character Mode

Set Enlarged Selects enlarged characters for one SO 14 0E

Character Mode line only

Cancel Enlarged Cancels one-line enlarged character DC4 or 20 or 24 14 or 18

Character Mode printing CAN

Set/Cancel Sets (n=1) or cancels (n=0) enlarged ESC W n 27 87 n 1B 57 n

Enlarged character printing. When n=0, SO

Character Mode enlarged printing will also be canceled

Set Super/Subscript Sets superscript (n=0) or subscript (n=1) ESC S n 27 83 n 1B 53 n

Print Mode printing

Cancel Cancels superscript or subscript printing ESC T 27 84 1B 54

Super/Subscript

Print Mode

APPENDICES

A-65

Command name Function Sequence Decimal Hexadecimal

Set/Cancel When n=1, subsequent characters ESC - n 27 45 n 1B 2D n

Underline Print (including spaces, but excluding

Mode horizontal tabs) are underlined.

When n=0, this effect is canceled

Set/Cancel When n=1, subsequent characters ESC _ n 27 95 n 1B 5F n

Overline Print (including spaces, but excluding

Mode horizontal tabs) are overlined.

When n=0, this effect is canceled

Select Double- Depending on the values of m3 and m4, ESC [ @ 4 27 91 64 4 1B 5B 40 04

High/Double- double-height and/or double-width 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00

Width Mode printing is enabled or disabled m3 m4 m3 m4 m3 m4

Select Character Allows printing of the symbols in ESC 6 27 54 1B 36

Set II Character Set II

Select Character Allows printing of the symbols in ESC 7 27 55 1B 37

Set I Character Set I

Select Characters Allows (n1 + (n2 x 256)) characters to be ESC \ n1 n2 27 92 n1 n2 1B 5C n1 n2

from All Character printed from the All Characters Table. {data} {data} {data}

Table Control codes in the data are ignored

Select a Character Prints one character (c) from the All ESC ^ c 27 94 c 1B 5E c

from All Character Character Table

Table

Define 8-dot Allows definition of user-defined ESC = n1 n2 27 61 n1 n2 1B 3D n1 n2

Download characters sp m a1 a2 32 m a1 a2 20 m a1 a2

Characters {data} {data} {data}

Select Download Selects font and print quality (n=0 or 2 - ESC I n 27 73 n 1B 49 n

Font internal fonts, n=4 or 6 - downloaded

fonts)

Set Single-Density Selects and prints single-density bit-image ESC K n1 27 75 n1 n2 1B 4B n1 n2

Bit Image Mode data n2 {data} {data} {data}

Set Double-Density Selects and prints double-density bit ESC L n1 27 76 n1 n2 1B 4C n1 n2

Bit Image Mode image data n2 {data} {data} {data}

Set Double-Speed Selects and prints “double speed” double- ESC Y n1 27 89 n1 n2 1B 59 n1 n2

Double-Density Bit density bit image data n2 {data} {data} {data}

Image Mode

Set Quadruple- Selects and prints quadruple-density bit ESC Z n1 27 90 n1 n2 1B 5A n1 n2

Density Bit Image image data n2 {data} {data} {data}

Mode

Set Scalable Font Selects horizontal ratio ESC CR ! 27 13 33 1B 0D 21

Ratio (original) (n=0.25 to 3 step 0.01) n H n 72 n 48

Selects vertical ratio ESC CR ! 27 13 33 1B 0D 21

(n-0.25 to 3 step 0.01) n V n 86 n 56

Execute Card Data Execute saved card data ESC CR ! 27 13 33 1B 0D 21

(original) n E n 69 n 45

USER’S GUIDE

A-66

HP-GL Mode

Command Mnemonic Parameters

Vector Group

ARC ABSOLUTE AA x_center, y_center, sweep_angle [, chord_angle];

ARC RELATIVE AR x_increment, y_increment, sweep_angle [, chord_angle];

PLOT ABSOLUTE PA [x, y … [, x, y]];

PLOT RELATIVE PR [x, y … [, x, y]];

PEN DOWN PD [x, y … [, x, y]];

PEN UP PU [x, y … [, x, y]];

Polygon Group

CIRCLE CI radius [, chord_angle];

SHADE RECTANGLE ABSOLUTE RA x_coordinate, y_coordinate;

SHADE RECTANGLE RELATIVE RR x_increment, y_increment;

EDGE RECTANGLE ABSOLUTE EA x_coordinate, y_coordinate;

EDGE RECTANGLE RELATIVE ER x_increment, y_increment;

SHADE WEDGE WG radius, start_angle, sweep_angle [, chord_angle];

EDGE WEDGE EW radius, start_angle, sweep_angle [, chord_angle];

Character Group

SELECT STANDARD SET SS

SELECT ALTERNATE SET SA

ABSOLUTE DIRECTION DI [run, rise];

RELATIVE DIRECTION DR [run, rise];

ABSOLUTE CHARACTER SIZE SI [width, height];

RELATIVE CHARACTER SIZE SR [width, height];

CHARACTER SLANT SL [tangent_of_angle];

STANDARD SET DEFINITION CS [Designate_standard_character_set];

ALTERNATE SET DEFINITION CA [Designate_alternate_character_set];

LABEL LB [char … [char]] l bterm

DEFINE LABEL TERMINATOR DT [l bterm];

CHARACTER PLOT CP [spaces, lines];

USER DEFINED CHARACTER UC [[pen_control], x_increment, y_increment [, ... ]

[, pen_control][, ... ]];

Line and Fill Attributes Group

LINE TYPE LT [line_type [, pattern_length]];

PEN WIDTH PW [width [, pen]];

SELECT PEN SP [pen];

SYMBOL MODE SM [char];

FILL TYPE FT [fill_type [, option 1 [, option 2]]];

TICK LENGTH TL [tick_p [, tick_n]];

X TICK XT

Y TICK YT

PEN THICKNESS PT [fill_line_interval];

Configuration and Status Group

SCALE SC [x 1, x 2, y 1, y 2];

INPUT WINDOW IW [x L L, y L L, x U R, y U R];

INPUT P1 AND P2 IP [p 1 x, p 1 y [, p 2 x, p 2 y]];

DEFAULT VALUES DF ;

INITIALIZE IN ;

ROTATE COORDINATE SYSTEM RO [angle];

PAGE OUTPUT PG [copy_number];

APPENDICES

A-67

Function Command Decimal Hexadecimal

Go to Other Emulations

BR-Script 2 Batch Mode ESC CR AB 27 13 65 66 1B 0D 41 42

BR-Script 2 Interactive Mode ESC CR AI 27 13 65 73 1B 0D 41 49

HP LaserJet ESC CR H 27 13 72 1B 0D 48

IBM Proprinter XL ESC CR I 27 13 73 1B 0D 49

EPSON FX-850 ESC CR E 27 13 69 1B 0D 45

High Resolution Control (HRC)

Set HRC Off ESC CR R O 27 13 82 79 1B 0D 52 4F

Set HRC to Light Level ESC CR R L 27 13 82 76 1B 0D 52 4C

Set HRC to Medium Level ESC CR R M 27 13 82 77 1B 0D 52 4D

Set HRC to Dark Level ESC CR R D 27 13 82 68 1B 0D 52 44

User Reset

Restore to User Settings ESC CR ! n R 27 13 33 n 82 1B 0D 21 n 52

n = 0 to 2

Factory Reset

Restore to Factory Settings ESC CR F D 27 13 70 68 1B 0D 46 44

Duplex/Simplex Print (available when duplex unit is installed) (original)

Set Simplex ESC CR ! 0 D 27 13 33 48 68 1B 0D 21 30 44

Set Duplex & long edge binding ESC CR ! 1 D 27 13 33 49 68 1B 0D 21 31 44

Set Duplex & short edge binding ESC CR ! 2 D 27 13 33 50 68 1B 0D 21 32 44

Page Side Selection (available when duplex unit is installed) (original)

Set next side ESC CR ! 0 S 27 13 33 48 83 1B 0D 21 30 53

Set front side ESC CR ! 1 S 27 13 33 49 83 1B 0D 21 31 53

Set back side ESC CR ! 2 S 27 13 33 50 83 1B 0D 21 32 53

Scalable Font Ratio (original)

Set horizontal ratio ESC CR ! n H 27 13 33 n 72 1B 0D 21 n 48

(n=0.25 to 3 step 0.01)

Set vertical ratio ESC CR ! n V 27 13 33 n 86 1B 0D 21 n 56

(n=0.25 to 3 step 0.01)

Execute Card Data (original)

Execute saved card data ESC CR ! n E 27 13 33 n 69 1B 0D 21 n 45

USER’S GUIDE

A-68

Bar Code Control

The printer can print bar codes in the HP LaserJet, EPSON

FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL emulation modes.

Print Bar Codes or Expanded Characters

Code ESC i

Dec 27 105

Hex 1B 69

Format: ESC i n … n \

Creates bar codes or expanded characters according to the segment of

parameters “n … n”. For further information about parameters, see the

following “Definition of Parameters.” This command must end with the

“ \ ” code (5CH).

[Definition of Parameters]

This bar code command can have the following parameters in the

parameter segment (n … n). Since parameters are effective within the

single command syntax ESC i n … n \, they don’t take effect in the

subsequent bar code commands. If certain parameters are not specified,

they take the default settings. The last parameter must be the bar code

data start (“b” or “B”) or the expanded character data start (“l” or “L”).

Other parameters can be specified in any sequence. The prefix of each

parameter can be a lower-case or upper-case character: for example, “t0”

or “T0”, “s3” or “S3”, etc.

■ Bar Code Mode

n = “t0” or “T0” CODE 39 (default)

n = “t1” or “T1” Interleaved 2 of 5

n = “t3” or “T3” FIM (US-Post Net)

n = “t4” or “T4” Post Net (US-Post Net)

n = “t5” or “T5” EAN 8, EAN 13, or UPC A

n = “t6” or “T6” UPC E

n = “t9” or “T9” Codabar

n = “t12” or “T12” Code 128 set A

n = “t13” or “T13” Code 128 set B

n = “t14” or “T14” Code 128 set C

n = “t130” or “T130” ISBN (EAN)

n = “t131” or “T131” ISBN (UPC-E)

n = “t132” or “T132” EAN 128 set A

n = “t133” or “T133” EAN 128 set B

n = “t134” or “T134” EAN 128 set C

This parameter selects the bar code mode as above. When n is “t5” or

“T5”, the bar code mode (EAN 8, EAN 13, or UPC A) varies

according to the number of characters in the data.

APPENDICES

A-69

■Bar Code, Expanded Character, Line Block Drawing & Box Drawing

n = “s0” or “S0” 3 : 1 (default)

n = “s1” or “S1” 2 : 1

n = “s3” or “S3” 2.5 : 1

This parameter selects the bar code style as above. When the EAN 8,

EAN 13, UPC-A, Code 128 or EAN 128 bar code mode is selected,

this bar code style parameter is ignored.

Expanded Character

“S” 0 = White

1 = Black

2 = Vertical stripes

3 = Horizontal stripes

4 = Cross hatch

eg. “S” n1 n2

n1 = Background fill pattern

n2 = Foreground fill pattern

If “S” is followed by only one parameter, the parameter

is a foreground fill pattern.

Line Block Drawing & Box Drawing

“S” 1 = Black

2 = Vertical stripes

3 = Horizontal stripes

4 = Cross hatch

■Bar Code

n = “mnnn” or “Mnnn” (nnn = 0 ~ 32767)

This parameter specifies the bar code width. The unit of "nnn" is %.

USER’S GUIDE

A-70

■Bar Code Human Readable Line On or Off

n = “r0” or “R0” Human readable line OFF

n = “r1” or “R1” Human readable line ON

Default: Human readable line ON

(1) “T5” or “t5”

(2) “T6” or “t6”

(3) “T130” or “t130”

(4) “T131” or “t131”

Default: Human readable line OFF

All others

This parameter specifies whether or not the printer prints the human

readable line below the bar code. Human readable characters are

always printed with OCR-B font of 10 pitch and all the current

character style enhancements are masked. Note that the default setting

is subject to the bar code mode selected by “t” or “T”.

■Quiet Zone

n = “onnn” or “Onnn” (nnn = 0 ~ 32767)

Quiet Zone is the space on both side of the bar codes. Its width can be

specified using the units which are set by the “u” of “U” parameter.

(For the description of “u” or “U” parameter, see the next section.)

The default setting of Quiet Zone width is 1 inch.

■Bar Code, Expanded Character Unit, Line Block Drawing & Box

Drawing

n = “u0” or “U0” Millimeters (default)

n = “u1” or “U1” 1/10”

n = “u2” or “U2” 1/100”

n = “u3” or “U3” 1/12”

n = “u4” or “U4” 1/120”

n = “u5” or “U5” 1/10 Millimeters

n = “u6” or “U6” 1/300”

n = “u7” or “U7” 1/720”

This parameter specifies the measurement units of X-axis offset, Y-

axis offset, and bar code height.

APPENDICES

A-71

■ Bar Code, Expanded Character, Line Block Drawing & Box Drawing

Offset in X-axis

n = “xnnn” or “Xnnn”

This parameter specifies the offset from the left margin in the “u”- or

“U”-specified unit.

■ Bar Code & Expanded Character Offset in Y-axis

n = “ynnn” or “Ynnn”

This parameter specifies the downward offset from the current print

position in the “u”- or “U”-specified unit.

■ Bar Code, Expanded Character, Line Block Drawing & Box Drawing

Height

n = “hnnn”, “Hnnn”, “dnnn”, or “Dnnn”

(1) EAN13, EAN8, UPC-A, ISBN (EAN13, EAN8, UPC-A),

ISBN (UPC-E): 22 mm

(2) UPC-E: 18 mm

(3) Others: 12 mm

Expanded characters ➞2.2 mm (default)

Line Block Drawing & Box Drawing ➞1 dot

This parameter specifies the height of bar codes or expanded

characters as above. It can take the prefix “h”, “H”, “d”, or “D”. The

height of bar codes is specified in the “u”- or “U”-specified unit. Note

that the default setting of the bar code height (12 mm, 18 mm or 22

mm) is subject to the bar code mode selected by “t” or “T”.

■Expanded Character Width, Line Block Drawing & Box Drawing

n = “wnnn” or “Wnnn”

Expanded character ➞1.2 mm

Line Block Drawing & Box Drawing ➞1 dot

This parameter specifies the width of expanded characters as above.

USER’S GUIDE

A-72

■ Expanded Character Rotation

n = “a0” or “A1” Upright (default)

n = “a1” or “A1” Rotated 90 degrees

n = “a2” or “A2” Upside down, rotated 180 degrees

n = “a3” or “A3” Rotated 270 degrees

■ Bar Code Data Start

n = “b” or “B”

Data that follows “b” or “B” is read in as bar code data. Bar code data

must end with the “ \ ” code (5CH), which also terminates this

command. The acceptable bar code data is subject to the bar code

mode selected by “t” or “T”.

• When CODE 39 is selected with the parameter “t0” or “T0”:

Forty three characters “0” to “9”, “A” to “Z”, “-”, “ . ”, “ (space)”,

“$”, “ / ”, “+”, and “%” can be accepted as bar code data. Other

characters cause data error. The number of characters for bar codes is

not limited. The bar code data automatically starts and ends with an

asterisk “ * ” (start character and stop character). If the received data

has an asterisk “ * ” at its beginning or end, the asterisk is regarded as

a start character or stop character.

• When Interleaved 2 of 5 is selected with the parameter “t1” or “T1”:

Ten numerical characters “0” to “9” can be accepted as bar code data.

Other characters cause data error. The number of characters for bar

codes is not limited. Since this mode of bar codes require even

characters, if the bar code data has odd characters, the zero character

“0” is automatically added to the end of the bar code data.

• When FIM (US-Post Net) is selected with the parameter “t3” or “T3”:

Characters “A” to “D” are valid and 1 digit of data can be printed.

Uppercase and lowercase alphabet characters can be accepted.

• When Post Net (US-Post Net) is selected with the parameter “t4” or

“T4”:

Characters “0” to “9” can be data and it must be terminated by a check

digit. “?” can be used in place of the check digit.

APPENDICES

A-73

• When EAN 8, EAN 13, or UPC A is selected with the parameter “t5”

or “T5”:

Ten numerical characters “0” to “9” can be accepted as bar code data.

The number of characters for bar codes is limited as follows.

EAN 8: Total 8 digits (7 digits + 1 check digit)

EAN 13: Total 13 digits (12 digits + 1 check digit)

UPC A: Total 12 digits (11 digits + 1 check digit)

A number of characters other than above causes data error and the bar

code data is printed as normal print data. If the check digit is

incorrect, the printer calculates the correct check digit automatically

so that the correct bar code data will be printed. When EAN13 is

selected, adding “+” and a 2-or 5-digit number after the data can

create an add-on code.

• When UPC-E is selected with the parameter “t6” or “T6”:

The numerical characters “0” to “9” can be accepted as bar code data.

(1) 8 digits Standard format. The first character

must be “0” and the data must be terminated by

a check digit.

Total 8 digits = “0” + 6 digits + 1 check digit.

(2) 6 digits The first character and the last

check digit are removed from the 8 digit data.

*1: For 8 digits, “?” can be used in place of a check digit.

*2: Adding “+” and 2- or 5-digit number after the data creates

an add-on code for all 6 and 8 digit formats.

• When Codabar is selected with the parameter “t9” or “T9”:

Characters “0” to “9”, “-”, “ . ”, “$”, “/”, “+”, “ : ” can be printed.

Characters “A” to “D” can be printed as a start-stop code, which can

be uppercase or lowercase. If there is no start-stop code, errors occur.

A check digit cannot be added and using “?” causes errors.

• When Code 128 Set A, Set B, or Set C is selected with the parameter

“t12” or “T12,” “t13” or “T13,” or “t14” or “T14” respectively:

Code 128 sets A, B and C are individually selectable. Set A encodes

characters Hex 00 … 5F. Set B encodes characters Hex 20 … 7F. Set

C encodes numeric pairs 00 … 99. Switching is allowed between the

code sets by sending %A, %B, or %C. FNC 1, 2, 3, and 4 are

produced with %1, %2, %3, and %4. The SHIFT code, %S, allows

temporary switching (for 1 character only) from set A to set B and

vice versa. The “%” character can be encoded by sending it twice.

USER’S GUIDE

A-74

• When ISBN (EAN) is selected with the parameter “t130” or “T130”:

Same rules apply as for “t5” or “T5”

• When ISBN (UPC-E) is selected with the parameter “t131” or

“T131”:

Same rules apply as for “t6” or “T6”

• When EAN 128 set A, set B or set C is selected with the parameter

“t132” or “T132”, “t133” or “T133” or “t134” or “T134” respectively:

Same rules apply as for “t12” or “T12”, “t13” or “T13”, or “t14” or

“T14”.

■Box Drawing

ESC i … E (or e)

“E” or “e” is a terminator.

■Line Block Drawing

ESC i … V (or v)

“V” or “v” is a terminator.

■Expanded Character Data Start

n = “l” or “L”

Data that follows “l” or “L” is read in as expanded character data (or

labeling data). Expanded character data must end with the “ \ ” code

(5CH), which also terminates this command.

[Example Program Listings]

WIDTH "LPT1:",255

'CODE 39

LPRINT CHR$(27);"it0r1s0o0x00y00bCODE39?\";

'Interleaved 2 of 5

LPRINT CHR$(27);"it1r1s0o0x00y20b123456?\";

'FIM

LPRINT CHR$(27);"it3r1o0x00y40bA\";

APPENDICES

A-75

'Post Net

LPRINT CHR$(27);"it4r1o0x00y60b1234567890?\";

'EAN-8

LPRINT CHR$(27);"it5r1o0x00y70b1234567?\";

'UPC-A

LPRINT CHR$(27);"it5r1o0x50y70b12345678901?\";

'EAN-13

LPRINT CHR$(27);"it5r1o0x100y70b123456789012?\";

'UPC-E

LPRINT CHR$(27);"it6r1o0x150y70b0123456?\";

'Codabar

LPRINT CHR$(27);"it9r1s0o0x00y100bA123456A\";

'Code 128 set A

LPRINT CHR$(27);"it12r1o0x00y120bCODE128A12345?\";

'Code 128 set B

LPRINT CHR$(27);"it13r1o0x00y140bCODE128B12345?\";

'Code 128 set C

LPRINT CHR$(27);"it14r1o0x00y160b";CHR$(1);CHR$(2);"?\";

'ISBN(EAN)

LPRINTCHR$(27);"it130r1o0x00y180b123456789012?+12345\";

'EAN 128 set A

LPRINT CHR$(27);"it132r1o0x00y210b1234567890?\";

LPRINT CHR$(12)

END

INDEX

Index–1

INDEX

—A—

Alarm LED 4-5

Auto Form Feed 4-42

Auto Mode 4-22

Automatic Emulation Selection 1-3, 3-1

Automatic Interface Selection 1-3, 2-14, 3-3, 4-18

—B—

Belt Cartridge Lock Lever 2-5, 5-13

bitmapped fonts 4-49

BR-Script 2 Mode 4-12, 4-62

—C—

Card List 4-35

Card Operation 4-33

Cassette Feed 3-13

Character Set 4-28

charging wire 5-22

Color Advanced Photoscale Technology 1-2

Color Advanced Photoscale Technology

(CAPT) Setting 4-30

Color Mode 4-26

communications parameters 2-14, 3-3

Computer Requirements 2-20

consumable 5-1

Continue button 4-58

Continue Mode 4-44

control panel 4-1

Copy button 4-67

—D—

Data Compression 1-3

Data LED 4-5

Delete

Data 4-40

Font 4-40

Format Card 4-41

Macro 4-40

Demo Page 2-18

Display 4-1

t (DOWN) button 4-7

Download Font 4-39

Drum Cleaner 5-20

Drum Cover 5-20

—E—

Economy button 4-63

Emulation button 4-60

Emulation Mode 1-3, 4-62

Envelopes 3-11

EPSON FX-850 Mode 4-9, 4-62

Error Messages 6-4

Error Print 4-43

Execute Data 4-35

Exit Mode 4-46

Extended I/O Interface 4-20

—F—

Factory Settings 3-7

Fax / Modem card 1-5

Feeder button 4-64

Flash memory card 1-5, 1-6, 5-31

Font button 4-47

Font Card 5-31

Form Feed button 4-57

Form Feed Suppress 4-43

Format Mode 4-21

Fuing Unit 5-17

Fuser Cleaner 2-9, 5-9

—G—

Graphics Mode 4-27

—H—

HDD card 1-5, 1-6, 5-31

Hex Dump Mode 4-77

High Resolution Control 1-2

High Resolution Control (HRC) Setting4-31

HP PCL5C Mode 4-9, 4-62

HP-GL Mode 4-14, 4-62

—I—

IBM Proprinter XL Mode 4-9, 4-62

Input Buffer 4-45

interface cable 2-14

interface connector 2-14

interface mode 4-18

USER’S GUIDE

Index–2

—L—

LCD 4-1

LED 4-5

Legal Cassette 1-6

Line Settings 4-26

list

internal or resident fonts 2-18

optional cartridge/card fonts 2-18

permanent download fonts 2-18

printer settings 2-18

List of Factory Settings 4-69

List of Fonts 4-55

List of Symbol/Character Sets 4-56

Lock panel 4-41

Lower Media Cassette 5-29

Lower Tray Unit 1-6, 5-29

—M—

Maintenance Message 4-4, 5-1, 5-2, 6-3

Manual Feed 3-14

Manual Mode 4-66

Media Cassette 2-12

Media Type 4-66

Modular I/O (MIO) Card 1-6, 5-34

MIO card slot 3-3

MIO interface 3-3

Mode button 4-8

—N—

Network Mode 4-41

non guaranteed print area 3-10

—O—

Oil Bottle 2-9, 5-6

Oil Bottle Lock Lever 2-1, 5-7, 5-9

On Line LED 4-5

(OPC) Belt Cartridge 2-5, 5-13

(OPC) Belt Tension Release Pin 2-6

Opetator Call Message 5-1, 6-1

Optional Fonts 5-33

Optional Legal Cassette 2-11, 3-8, 3-9

Options 1-6

Orientation 4-21

Ozone Filter 5-16

Ozone Filter Case 5-16

—P—

Page Counter 4-46

Page Format Mode 4-23

Page Protection 4-32

Panel Buttons 3-6

Paper Discharger 5-22

Paper Guide 2-13

Paper Jam 6-9

Paper Size 3-8

parallel interface 2-14, 3-3, 4-19

PCL5C mode 3-1

PCMCIA Card Slot 1-5

Pen Setting 4-27

power cord 2-16

Power Save Mode 1-4, 4-63

Pressure Release Lever 2-9, 5-19

primary font 4-47

Primary Font or Secondary Font 4-38

printable area 3-10

Printer Driver 2-20

Printer Status Messages 4-2

Protective Parts 2-4

Protective Sheet 2-6, 5-14

—R—

RAM Expansion 1-6, 5-35

Ready LED 4-5

Rear Side Cover 5-16

Reprint Function 4-57

Reset button 4-68

Resolution 4-29

Resolution Mode 4-29

Right and Left Margins 4-25

—S—

Save

Data 4-36

Macro 4-37

Save Settings 4-46

Scalable Font 4-44, 4-49

secondary font 4-47

Sel button 4-6

Serial Interface 2-14, 3-3, 4-19

Service Call Messages 6-6

Set button 4-7

Shift button 4-59

SIMM 5-35

Small Size 4-66

Standard Media Cassette 2-11, 3-8, 3-9

—T—

Tension Release Pin 5-14

Test button 4-75

INDEX

Index–3

Test Pattern 2-18

Toner Cartridge 2-7, 5-3

Toner Save Mode 1-4, 4-63

Transfer Roller 5-24

Transfer Roller Lock Lever 5-24

—U—

s (UP) button 4-7

User Settings 3-7

—W—

Waste Toner Pack 5-11

Waste Toner Pack Holder 5-12

Windows 2-20, 6-14

—1—

120K Kit 5-20

USER’S GUIDE

Index-4

Brother Hl 2400C Series Users Manual COV

Brother-Hl-2400C-Owner-S-Manual brother-hl-2400c-owner-s-manual

Brother-Hl-2400Cn-Owner-S-Manual brother-hl-2400cn-owner-s-manual

Manual en-US%5CPrinters%5CConsumer%5CUsersManual%5CUM_HL_2400C_2400CN_EN_21 Brother HL-2400C Printer User Manual | Manual Device

HL-2400C Series UM_HL_2400C_2400CN_EN_21

HL-2400C Series to the manual b5715e31-5498-9654-752a-1a5a506b02a3

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation